Nokia 7210 SAS 22.9.R1 Issue 01
Legal Disclaimers
Customer Documentation and Product Support
Legal Disclaimers
Customer Documentation and Product Support
7210 SAS-D, Dxp, K 2F1C2T, K 2F6C4T, K 3SFP+ 8C Basic System Configuration Guide Release 22.9.R1
Legal notice
Getting started
About this guide
Document structure and content
7210 SAS modes of operation
7210 SAS port modes
7210 SAS system configuration process
Conventions
Precautionary and information messages
Options or substeps in procedures and sequential workflows
CLI usage
CLI structure
Navigating in the CLI
CLI contexts
Basic CLI commands
CLI environment commands
CLI monitor commands
Getting help in the CLI
The CLI command prompt
Displaying configuration contexts
EXEC files
Entering CLI commands
Command completion
Unordered parameters
Editing keystrokes
Absolute paths
History
Entering numerical ranges
Pipe/match
Redirection
Basic command reference
Command hierarchies
Global CLI commands
Monitor commands
Environment commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Global commands
Environment commands
Show commands
Monitor commands
File system management
The file system
Compact flash devices
USB storage device
URLs
Wildcards
File management tasks
Modifying file attributes
Creating directories
Copying files
Moving files
Removing files and deleting directories
Displaying directory and file information
File command reference
Command hierarchy
Configuration commands
Configuration commands
File commands
Boot options
System initialization
Contents of factory-shipped 7210 SAS systems
System boot option modes
Auto-init mode
Ping check in auto-init mode
Manual mode
BOF and configuration file encryption
Bootstrap load process
Boot options on 7210 SAS platforms
System boot options on 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp devices
System boot options on 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C devices
Storage locations for index files (ndx, sdx) and images for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Configuration file and TiMOS image loading
Boot sequence and image loading
Persistence
Configuration guidelines for use of auto-init and manual mode
Configuration guidelines for use of software images on the 7210 SAS-D with 128MB
BOF password
Resetting the node to the factory default setting
Security for console port and Ethernet management port
Initial system startup process flow
Configuration notes
Configuring boot file options with CLI
BOF configuration overview
Basic BOF configuration
Common configuration tasks
Searching for the BOF
Accessing the CLI
Configuring BOF encryption
Configuring the BOF interactive menu password
Configuring configuration file encryption
Console connection
Procedure to connect to a console
Location of console ports on 7210 SAS platforms
7210 SAS-D console port
7210 SAS-Dxp 12p console port
7210 SAS-Dxp 16p console port
7210 SAS-Dxp 24p console port
7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T Console Port
7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T console port
7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C console port
Service management tasks
System administration commands
Viewing the current configuration
Modifying and saving a configuration
Deleting BOF parameters
Saving a configuration to a different filename
Rebooting
BOF command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
File management commands
BOF processing control commands
Console port configuration commands
Image and configuration management commands
DNS configuration commands
Show commands
System management
System management parameters
System information
System name
System contact
System location
System coordinates
Naming objects
CLLI
System time
Time zones
Network Time Protocol (NTP)
SNTP time synchronization
CRON
High availability
HA features
Redundancy
Component redundancy
Temperature threshold alarm and fan speed
Network synchronization
Central synchronization subsystem
Synchronization options available on 7210 SAS platforms
Synchronization status messages (SSM)
Synchronous Ethernet
Clock source quality level definitions
IEEE 1588v2 PTP
PTP clock synchronization
Performance considerations
PTP message transparent forwarding
PTP capabilities
PTP ordinary timeReceiver clock for frequency
PTP boundary clock for frequency and time
IEC/IEEE 61850-9-3 and C37.238-2017
Configuration guidelines and restrictions for PTP
Configuration to change reference from SyncE to PTP on 7210 SAS-D ETR
Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
System resource allocation
Allocation of ingress internal TCAM resources
Allocation of egress internal TCAM resources
System resource allocation examples
System configuration process overview
Configuration notes
General
Configuring system management with CLI
Saving configurations
Basic system configuration
Common configuration tasks
System information
System information parameters
Name
Contact
Location
CLLI code
Coordinates
System time elements
Zone
Summer time conditions
NTP
Authentication-check
Authentication-key
Broadcast
Broadcastclient
NTP-server
Peer
Server
SNTP
Broadcast-client
Server-address
CRON
Schedule
Script
Time range
Create
Absolute
Daily
Weekdays
Weekend
Weekly
Time of Day
SAPs
Egress
Filters
Ingress
Configuring backup copies
System administration parameters
Validating the golden bootstrap image
Updating the golden bootstrap image
Disconnect
Set-time
Display-config
Tech-support
Save
Reboot
Post-boot configuration extension files
Show command output and console messages
System timing
CLI command syntax for 7210 SAS platforms
CLI syntax for 7210 SAS-D
CLI syntax for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Entering edit mode
Configuring timing references
Using the revert command
Other editing commands
Forcing a specific reference
Configuring system monitoring thresholds
Creating events
Configuring an alarm input
Configuring system resource profile
Configuring LLDP
System command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
System information commands
System alarm commands
PTP commands for 7210 SAS-D ETR, 7210 SAS-Dxp 12p ETR, 7210 SAS-Dxp 16p, 7210 SAS-Dxp 24p, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
PTP commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
System time commands
CRON commands
Script control commands
System port LAG MAC assignment commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
System administration commands
System alarm contact commands
System console commands
System synchronization commands
LLDP system commands
System resource-profile commands for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
System resource-profile commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Fan controller commands for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-D ETR variant with 128MB flash
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Fan controller debug command (applicable only to 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-D ETR variant with 128MB flash)
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
System information commands
System alarm commands
PTP commands
Date and time commands
Network Time Protocol Commands
SNTP Commands
CRON Commands
Time Range Commands
Time of Day Commands
Script Control Commands
System Time Commands
System synchronization commands
System port LAG MAC assignment commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
System administration commands
System alarm contact commands
LLDP system commands
LLDP Ethernet port commands
System resource-profile commands
Fan controller commands
Show commands
System commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Fan controller debug commands
Appendix: 7210 SAS boot procedures
Procedure to boot using auto-init mode
Procedures to boot using manual mode
Procedure to boot from the image on flash in manual mode
Procedure to boot from the network in manual mode using uplink ports
Procedure to boot from the network in manual mode using the OOB Ethernet management port
Procedure to boot when the BOF is present locally
Procedure to boot in the satellite mode
Procedure to boot in the standalone-VC mode
Standards and protocol support
Customer Documentation and Product Support
Legal notice
Getting started
About this guide
Document structure and content
7210 SAS modes of operation
7210 SAS port modes
7210 SAS system configuration process
Conventions
Precautionary and information messages
Options or substeps in procedures and sequential workflows
CLI usage
CLI structure
Navigating in the CLI
CLI contexts
Basic CLI commands
CLI environment commands
CLI monitor commands
Getting help in the CLI
The CLI command prompt
Displaying configuration contexts
EXEC files
Entering CLI commands
Command completion
Unordered parameters
Editing keystrokes
Absolute paths
History
Entering numerical ranges
Pipe/match
Redirection
Basic command reference
Command hierarchies
Global CLI commands
Monitor commands
Environment commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Global commands
Environment commands
Show commands
Monitor commands
File system management
The file system
Compact flash devices
USB storage device
URLs
Wildcards
File management tasks
Modifying file attributes
Creating directories
Copying files
Moving files
Removing files and deleting directories
Displaying directory and file information
File command reference
Command hierarchy
Configuration commands
Configuration commands
File commands
Boot options
System initialization
Contents of factory-shipped 7210 SAS systems
System boot option modes
Auto-init mode
Ping check in auto-init mode
Manual mode
BOF and configuration file encryption
Bootstrap load process
Boot options on 7210 SAS platforms
System boot options on 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp devices
System boot options on 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C devices
Storage locations for index files (ndx, sdx) and images for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Configuration file and TiMOS image loading
Boot sequence and image loading
Persistence
Configuration guidelines for use of auto-init and manual mode
Configuration guidelines for use of software images on the 7210 SAS-D with 128MB
BOF password
Resetting the node to the factory default setting
Security for console port and Ethernet management port
Initial system startup process flow
Configuration notes
Configuring boot file options with CLI
BOF configuration overview
Basic BOF configuration
Common configuration tasks
Searching for the BOF
Accessing the CLI
Configuring BOF encryption
Configuring the BOF interactive menu password
Configuring configuration file encryption
Console connection
Procedure to connect to a console
Location of console ports on 7210 SAS platforms
7210 SAS-D console port
7210 SAS-Dxp 12p console port
7210 SAS-Dxp 16p console port
7210 SAS-Dxp 24p console port
7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T Console Port
7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T console port
7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C console port
Service management tasks
System administration commands
Viewing the current configuration
Modifying and saving a configuration
Deleting BOF parameters
Saving a configuration to a different filename
Rebooting
BOF command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
File management commands
BOF processing control commands
Console port configuration commands
Image and configuration management commands
DNS configuration commands
Show commands
System management
System management parameters
System information
System name
System contact
System location
System coordinates
Naming objects
CLLI
System time
Time zones
Network Time Protocol (NTP)
SNTP time synchronization
CRON
High availability
HA features
Redundancy
Component redundancy
Temperature threshold alarm and fan speed
Network synchronization
Central synchronization subsystem
Synchronization options available on 7210 SAS platforms
Synchronization status messages (SSM)
Synchronous Ethernet
Clock source quality level definitions
IEEE 1588v2 PTP
PTP clock synchronization
Performance considerations
PTP message transparent forwarding
PTP capabilities
PTP ordinary timeReceiver clock for frequency
PTP boundary clock for frequency and time
IEC/IEEE 61850-9-3 and C37.238-2017
Configuration guidelines and restrictions for PTP
Configuration to change reference from SyncE to PTP on 7210 SAS-D ETR
Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
System resource allocation
Allocation of ingress internal TCAM resources
Allocation of egress internal TCAM resources
System resource allocation examples
System configuration process overview
Configuration notes
General
Configuring system management with CLI
Saving configurations
Basic system configuration
Common configuration tasks
System information
System information parameters
Name
Contact
Location
CLLI code
Coordinates
System time elements
Zone
Summer time conditions
NTP
Authentication-check
Authentication-key
Broadcast
Broadcastclient
NTP-server
Peer
Server
SNTP
Broadcast-client
Server-address
CRON
Schedule
Script
Time range
Create
Absolute
Daily
Weekdays
Weekend
Weekly
Time of Day
SAPs
Egress
Filters
Ingress
Configuring backup copies
System administration parameters
Validating the golden bootstrap image
Updating the golden bootstrap image
Disconnect
Set-time
Display-config
Tech-support
Save
Reboot
Post-boot configuration extension files
Show command output and console messages
System timing
CLI command syntax for 7210 SAS platforms
CLI syntax for 7210 SAS-D
CLI syntax for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Entering edit mode
Configuring timing references
Using the revert command
Other editing commands
Forcing a specific reference
Configuring system monitoring thresholds
Creating events
Configuring an alarm input
Configuring system resource profile
Configuring LLDP
System command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
System information commands
System alarm commands
PTP commands for 7210 SAS-D ETR, 7210 SAS-Dxp 12p ETR, 7210 SAS-Dxp 16p, 7210 SAS-Dxp 24p, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
PTP commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
System time commands
CRON commands
Script control commands
System port LAG MAC assignment commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
System administration commands
System alarm contact commands
System console commands
System synchronization commands
LLDP system commands
System resource-profile commands for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
System resource-profile commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Fan controller commands for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-D ETR variant with 128MB flash
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Fan controller debug command (applicable only to 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-D ETR variant with 128MB flash)
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
System information commands
System alarm commands
PTP commands
Date and time commands
Network Time Protocol Commands
SNTP Commands
CRON Commands
Time Range Commands
Time of Day Commands
Script Control Commands
System Time Commands
System synchronization commands
System port LAG MAC assignment commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
System administration commands
System alarm contact commands
LLDP system commands
LLDP Ethernet port commands
System resource-profile commands
Fan controller commands
Show commands
System commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Fan controller debug commands
Appendix: 7210 SAS boot procedures
Procedure to boot using auto-init mode
Procedures to boot using manual mode
Procedure to boot from the image on flash in manual mode
Procedure to boot from the network in manual mode using uplink ports
Procedure to boot from the network in manual mode using the OOB Ethernet management port
Procedure to boot when the BOF is present locally
Procedure to boot in the satellite mode
Procedure to boot in the standalone-VC mode
Standards and protocol support
Customer Documentation and Product Support
7210 SAS-Mxp, R6, R12, S, Sx, T Basic System Configuration Guide Release 22.9.R1
Legal notice
Getting started
About this guide
Document structure and content
7210 SAS modes of operation
7210 SAS port modes
7210 SAS system configuration process
Conventions
Precautionary and information messages
Options or substeps in procedures and sequential workflows
CLI usage
CLI structure
Navigating in the CLI
CLI contexts
Basic CLI commands
CLI environment commands
CLI monitor commands
Getting help in the CLI
The CLI command prompt
Displaying configuration contexts
EXEC files
Entering CLI commands
Command completion
Unordered parameters
Editing keystrokes
Absolute paths
History
Entering numerical ranges
Pipe/match
Redirection
Configuration rollback
Feature behavior
Rescue configuration
Operational guidelines
Configuration guidelines and restrictions
Basic command reference
Command hierarchies
Basic CLI commands
Show commands
Monitor commands
Environment commands
Command descriptions
Global commands
CLI environment commands
Show commands
Monitor CLI commands
File system management
The file system
Compact flash devices
USB storage device
Storage locations for accounting, logs, index file, and images
Configuration guidelines for storing the TiMOS, boot.tim, bof.cfg, ndx, sdx, and nvsys.info file
URLs
Wildcards
File management tasks
Modifying file attributes
Creating directories
Copying files
Moving files
Removing files and deleting directories
Displaying directory and file information
File command reference
Command hierarchy
Configuration commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
File system commands
File commands
Boot options
System initialization
Contents of factory-shipped 7210 SAS systems
System boot option modes
Auto-init mode
Ping check in auto-init mode
Manual mode
BOF and configuration file encryption
Bootstrap load process
7210 SAS boot options and procedures
System boot options for 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, and 7210 SAS-T
System boot options for 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-S 1/10GE, 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE, and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE
System boot options for 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE, 7210 SAS-S 1/10GE, and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE in satellite mode
System boot options for 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-S 1/10GE, 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE, and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE in standalone mode
Configuration file and TiMOS image loading
Boot sequence and image loading
BOF chassis-role and host-type parameters for 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE, 7210 SAS-S 1/10GE, and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE
Configuration notes for 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE, 7210 SAS-S 1/10GE, 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE, and 7210 SAS-Mxp
Persistence
Configuration guidelines for auto-init and manual mode
Resetting the node to the factory default setting
BOF password
OOB Ethernet management port
IPv6 configuration guidelines in OOB node management
Security for console port and Ethernet management port
Initial system startup process flow
Configuration notes
Configuring boot file options with CLI
BOF configuration overview
Basic BOF configuration
Common configuration tasks
Searching for the BOF
Sample output of BOF configuration on bootup for 7210 SAS platforms
Sample output: BOF configuration on bootup for 7210 SAS-Mxp and 7210 SAS-T
Sample output: BOF configuration on bootup for 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
Sample output: BOF configuration on bootup for 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE
Accessing the CLI
Configuring BOF encryption
Configuring the BOF interactive menu password
Configuring the configuration file encryption
Console connection
Procedure to connect to a console
Location of console ports on 7210 SAS platforms
7210 SAS-Mxp console port
7210 SAS-R6 console port
7210 SAS-R12 console port
7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE console port
7210 SAS-S 1/10GE console port
7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE console port
7210 SAS-T console port
Configuring BOF parameters
Sample output: BOF configuration for 7210 SAS-Mxp and 7210 SAS-T
Sample output: BOF configuration for 7210 SAS-R6
Sample output: BOF configuration for 7210 SAS-R12
Sample output: BOF configuration for 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE
Service management tasks
System administration commands
Viewing the current configuration
Modifying and saving a configuration
Deleting BOF parameters
Saving a configuration to a different filename
Rebooting
BOF command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
File management commands
BOF processing control
Console port configuration
Image and configuration management
DNS configuration commands
Show commands
Virtual chassis
Overview
Node roles in the VC
Permitted platform combinations in a VC
Provisioning and booting up the VC in standalone mode
Required BOF parameters
Manually configuring nodes to boot as CPM-IMM in a VC
Manually booting a VC IMM-only node
Configuring an IMM-only node in a VC
Provisioning the card type for all nodes in a VC
Provisioning service entities
Preprovisioning a VC
Configuring a system resource profile for a VC
VC boot scenarios
First time manual boot of nodes in the stack
Subsequent reboot of the stack (with correct BOF present)
Replacing and upgrading a node in a VC
Replacing a standby/active CPM-IMM node with another CPM-IMM node
Replacing an IMM-only node with another node
Replacing the current active CPM node with another node
Expanding a VC by adding a new IMM-only node
Removing a node from a VC (standby CPM or IMM)
Adding a new standby CPM node into an existing VC
Configuration guidelines for upgrading, adding, or removing a VC node
VC split scenarios
Virtual chassis command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Standalone virtual chassis (VC) commands
System management
System management parameters
System information
System name
System contact
System location
System coordinates
Naming objects
CLLI
System time
Time zones
Network Time Protocol
SNTP time synchronization
CRON
High availability
HA features
Redundancy
Software redundancy on 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
Configuration redundancy on 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
Component redundancy
Service redundancy on 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
Accounting configuration redundancy on 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
Nonstop forwarding and routing on 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
Nonstop forwarding on 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
Nonstop routing on 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
CPM switchover on 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
Temperature threshold alarm and fan speed
Synchronization
Configuration and boot-env synchronization
State database synchronization
Synchronization and redundancy
Active and standby designations on 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
Active and standby designations on 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE in standalone-VC mode
When the active CPM goes offline
Configuration guidelines for synchronization of active and standby CPM on 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
Network synchronization
Central synchronization subsystem
Synchronization options available on 7210 SAS platforms
Synchronization Status Messages
DS1 signals
E1 signals
Synchronous Ethernet
Clock source quality level definitions
IEEE 1588v2 PTP
PTP clock synchronization
Performance considerations
PTP end-to-end Transparent Clock
PTP message transparent forwarding
PTP capabilities
PTP ordinary timeReceiver clock for frequency
PTP boundary clock for frequency and time
1PPS and 10MHz output interface
Configuration guidelines and restrictions for PTP
Configuration example to use PTP and SyncE references
Management of 1830 VWM
Introduction
Feature description
1830 CWDM shelf layout and description
1830 DWDM shelf layout and description
1830 VWM configuration guidelines and restrictions
1830 VWM LED functionality
Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
System resource allocation
Allocation of ingress internal TCAM resources
Allocation of egress internal TCAM resources
System resource allocation examples
7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12 configuration guidelines for system resource profile
System configuration process overview
Configuration notes
Configuring system management with CLI
Saving configurations
Basic system configuration
Common configuration tasks
System information
System information parameters
Name
Contact
Location
CLLI code
Coordinates
System time elements
Zone
Summer time conditions
NTP
Authentication-check
Authentication-key
Broadcast
Broadcastclient
NTP-server
Peer
Server
SNTP
Broadcast-client
Server-address
CRON
Action
Schedule
Script
Time range
Create
Absolute
Daily
Weekdays
Weekend
Weekly
Time of Day
SAPs
Egress
Filters
Ingress
Configuring backup copies
System administration parameters
Disconnect
Set-time
Display-config
Tech-support
Save
Reboot
Post-boot configuration extension files
Show command output and console messages
System timing
CLI command syntax for 7210 SAS platforms
CLI syntax for 7210 SAS-Mxp
CLI syntax for 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
CLI syntax for 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE
CLI syntax for 7210 SAS-T
Entering edit mode
Configuring timing references
Using the revert command
Other editing commands
Forcing a specific reference
Configuring system monitoring thresholds
Creating events
System alarm contact inputs
Configuring 1830 VWM
Configuring LLDP
System command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
System information commands
Virtual chassis (VC) configuration commands
VWM shelf management commands for 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
VWM shelf management commands for 7210 SAS-Mxp and 7210 SAS-T
System alarm commands
PTP commands
System time commands
CRON commands
Script control commands
System administration (admin) commands
High availability (redundancy) commands
Configuration rollback commands for the 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, and 7210 SAS-Mxp
Multi-chassis LAG commands
System port LAG MAC assignment commands for 7210 SAS-Mxp standalone, 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE standalone, and 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE: standalone and standalone-VC
System alarm contact commands
System synchronization commands for 7210 SAS-T
System synchronization commands for 7210 SAS-Mxp
System synchronization commands for 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
System synchronization commands for 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE, 7210 SAS-S 1/10GE, and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE
LLDP system commands
System resource-profile commands for 7210 SAS-T
System resource-profile commands for 7210 SAS-Mxp
System resource-profile router commands for 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE, 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE, and 7210 SAS-T
System resource-profile commands related to BGP LU FRR and LDPoRSVP FRR for 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE, 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE, and 7210 SAS-T
System resource-profile commands for 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE
System resource-profile commands for a Virtual Chassis
System resource-profile commands for 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
System resource-profile commands for MAC authentication
Global system resource profile commands for 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
Global system resource profile commands for a virtual chassis
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
System information commands
Virtual Chassis (VC) configuration commands
System alarm commands
PTP commands
Date and time commands
Network Time Protocol commands
SNTP commands
CRON commands
Time range commands
Time of day commands
Script control commands
System time commands
System synchronization commands
Generic commands
System administration commands
System alarm contact commands
Redundancy commands
System port LAG MAC assignment commands for 7210 SAS-Mxp standalone, 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE standalone, and 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE: standalone and standalone-VC
Rollback commands
Peer commands
MC-LAG commands
LLDP system commands
LLDP Ethernet port commands
System resource-profile commands
Global system resource profile commands
Show commands
System commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Appendix: 7210 SAS boot procedures
Procedure to boot using auto-init mode
Procedures to boot using manual mode
Procedure to boot from the image on flash in manual mode
Procedure to boot from the network in manual mode using uplink ports
Procedure to boot from the network in manual mode using the OOB Ethernet management port
Procedure to boot when the BOF is present locally
Procedure to boot in the satellite mode
Procedure to boot in the standalone-VC mode
Standards and protocol support
Customer Documentation and Product Support
Legal notice
Getting started
About this guide
Document structure and content
7210 SAS modes of operation
7210 SAS port modes
7210 SAS system configuration process
Conventions
Precautionary and information messages
Options or substeps in procedures and sequential workflows
CLI usage
CLI structure
Navigating in the CLI
CLI contexts
Basic CLI commands
CLI environment commands
CLI monitor commands
Getting help in the CLI
The CLI command prompt
Displaying configuration contexts
EXEC files
Entering CLI commands
Command completion
Unordered parameters
Editing keystrokes
Absolute paths
History
Entering numerical ranges
Pipe/match
Redirection
Configuration rollback
Feature behavior
Rescue configuration
Operational guidelines
Configuration guidelines and restrictions
Basic command reference
Command hierarchies
Basic CLI commands
Show commands
Monitor commands
Environment commands
Command descriptions
Global commands
CLI environment commands
Show commands
Monitor CLI commands
File system management
The file system
Compact flash devices
USB storage device
Storage locations for accounting, logs, index file, and images
Configuration guidelines for storing the TiMOS, boot.tim, bof.cfg, ndx, sdx, and nvsys.info file
URLs
Wildcards
File management tasks
Modifying file attributes
Creating directories
Copying files
Moving files
Removing files and deleting directories
Displaying directory and file information
File command reference
Command hierarchy
Configuration commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
File system commands
File commands
Boot options
System initialization
Contents of factory-shipped 7210 SAS systems
System boot option modes
Auto-init mode
Ping check in auto-init mode
Manual mode
BOF and configuration file encryption
Bootstrap load process
7210 SAS boot options and procedures
System boot options for 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, and 7210 SAS-T
System boot options for 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-S 1/10GE, 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE, and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE
System boot options for 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE, 7210 SAS-S 1/10GE, and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE in satellite mode
System boot options for 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-S 1/10GE, 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE, and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE in standalone mode
Configuration file and TiMOS image loading
Boot sequence and image loading
BOF chassis-role and host-type parameters for 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE, 7210 SAS-S 1/10GE, and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE
Configuration notes for 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE, 7210 SAS-S 1/10GE, 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE, and 7210 SAS-Mxp
Persistence
Configuration guidelines for auto-init and manual mode
Resetting the node to the factory default setting
BOF password
OOB Ethernet management port
IPv6 configuration guidelines in OOB node management
Security for console port and Ethernet management port
Initial system startup process flow
Configuration notes
Configuring boot file options with CLI
BOF configuration overview
Basic BOF configuration
Common configuration tasks
Searching for the BOF
Sample output of BOF configuration on bootup for 7210 SAS platforms
Sample output: BOF configuration on bootup for 7210 SAS-Mxp and 7210 SAS-T
Sample output: BOF configuration on bootup for 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
Sample output: BOF configuration on bootup for 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE
Accessing the CLI
Configuring BOF encryption
Configuring the BOF interactive menu password
Configuring the configuration file encryption
Console connection
Procedure to connect to a console
Location of console ports on 7210 SAS platforms
7210 SAS-Mxp console port
7210 SAS-R6 console port
7210 SAS-R12 console port
7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE console port
7210 SAS-S 1/10GE console port
7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE console port
7210 SAS-T console port
Configuring BOF parameters
Sample output: BOF configuration for 7210 SAS-Mxp and 7210 SAS-T
Sample output: BOF configuration for 7210 SAS-R6
Sample output: BOF configuration for 7210 SAS-R12
Sample output: BOF configuration for 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE
Service management tasks
System administration commands
Viewing the current configuration
Modifying and saving a configuration
Deleting BOF parameters
Saving a configuration to a different filename
Rebooting
BOF command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
File management commands
BOF processing control
Console port configuration
Image and configuration management
DNS configuration commands
Show commands
Virtual chassis
Overview
Node roles in the VC
Permitted platform combinations in a VC
Provisioning and booting up the VC in standalone mode
Required BOF parameters
Manually configuring nodes to boot as CPM-IMM in a VC
Manually booting a VC IMM-only node
Configuring an IMM-only node in a VC
Provisioning the card type for all nodes in a VC
Provisioning service entities
Preprovisioning a VC
Configuring a system resource profile for a VC
VC boot scenarios
First time manual boot of nodes in the stack
Subsequent reboot of the stack (with correct BOF present)
Replacing and upgrading a node in a VC
Replacing a standby/active CPM-IMM node with another CPM-IMM node
Replacing an IMM-only node with another node
Replacing the current active CPM node with another node
Expanding a VC by adding a new IMM-only node
Removing a node from a VC (standby CPM or IMM)
Adding a new standby CPM node into an existing VC
Configuration guidelines for upgrading, adding, or removing a VC node
VC split scenarios
Virtual chassis command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Standalone virtual chassis (VC) commands
System management
System management parameters
System information
System name
System contact
System location
System coordinates
Naming objects
CLLI
System time
Time zones
Network Time Protocol
SNTP time synchronization
CRON
High availability
HA features
Redundancy
Software redundancy on 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
Configuration redundancy on 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
Component redundancy
Service redundancy on 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
Accounting configuration redundancy on 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
Nonstop forwarding and routing on 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
Nonstop forwarding on 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
Nonstop routing on 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
CPM switchover on 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
Temperature threshold alarm and fan speed
Synchronization
Configuration and boot-env synchronization
State database synchronization
Synchronization and redundancy
Active and standby designations on 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
Active and standby designations on 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE in standalone-VC mode
When the active CPM goes offline
Configuration guidelines for synchronization of active and standby CPM on 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
Network synchronization
Central synchronization subsystem
Synchronization options available on 7210 SAS platforms
Synchronization Status Messages
DS1 signals
E1 signals
Synchronous Ethernet
Clock source quality level definitions
IEEE 1588v2 PTP
PTP clock synchronization
Performance considerations
PTP end-to-end Transparent Clock
PTP message transparent forwarding
PTP capabilities
PTP ordinary timeReceiver clock for frequency
PTP boundary clock for frequency and time
1PPS and 10MHz output interface
Configuration guidelines and restrictions for PTP
Configuration example to use PTP and SyncE references
Management of 1830 VWM
Introduction
Feature description
1830 CWDM shelf layout and description
1830 DWDM shelf layout and description
1830 VWM configuration guidelines and restrictions
1830 VWM LED functionality
Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
System resource allocation
Allocation of ingress internal TCAM resources
Allocation of egress internal TCAM resources
System resource allocation examples
7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12 configuration guidelines for system resource profile
System configuration process overview
Configuration notes
Configuring system management with CLI
Saving configurations
Basic system configuration
Common configuration tasks
System information
System information parameters
Name
Contact
Location
CLLI code
Coordinates
System time elements
Zone
Summer time conditions
NTP
Authentication-check
Authentication-key
Broadcast
Broadcastclient
NTP-server
Peer
Server
SNTP
Broadcast-client
Server-address
CRON
Action
Schedule
Script
Time range
Create
Absolute
Daily
Weekdays
Weekend
Weekly
Time of Day
SAPs
Egress
Filters
Ingress
Configuring backup copies
System administration parameters
Disconnect
Set-time
Display-config
Tech-support
Save
Reboot
Post-boot configuration extension files
Show command output and console messages
System timing
CLI command syntax for 7210 SAS platforms
CLI syntax for 7210 SAS-Mxp
CLI syntax for 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
CLI syntax for 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE
CLI syntax for 7210 SAS-T
Entering edit mode
Configuring timing references
Using the revert command
Other editing commands
Forcing a specific reference
Configuring system monitoring thresholds
Creating events
System alarm contact inputs
Configuring 1830 VWM
Configuring LLDP
System command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
System information commands
Virtual chassis (VC) configuration commands
VWM shelf management commands for 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
VWM shelf management commands for 7210 SAS-Mxp and 7210 SAS-T
System alarm commands
PTP commands
System time commands
CRON commands
Script control commands
System administration (admin) commands
High availability (redundancy) commands
Configuration rollback commands for the 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, and 7210 SAS-Mxp
Multi-chassis LAG commands
System port LAG MAC assignment commands for 7210 SAS-Mxp standalone, 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE standalone, and 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE: standalone and standalone-VC
System alarm contact commands
System synchronization commands for 7210 SAS-T
System synchronization commands for 7210 SAS-Mxp
System synchronization commands for 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
System synchronization commands for 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE, 7210 SAS-S 1/10GE, and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE
LLDP system commands
System resource-profile commands for 7210 SAS-T
System resource-profile commands for 7210 SAS-Mxp
System resource-profile router commands for 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE, 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE, and 7210 SAS-T
System resource-profile commands related to BGP LU FRR and LDPoRSVP FRR for 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE, 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE, and 7210 SAS-T
System resource-profile commands for 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE
System resource-profile commands for a Virtual Chassis
System resource-profile commands for 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
System resource-profile commands for MAC authentication
Global system resource profile commands for 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
Global system resource profile commands for a virtual chassis
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
System information commands
Virtual Chassis (VC) configuration commands
System alarm commands
PTP commands
Date and time commands
Network Time Protocol commands
SNTP commands
CRON commands
Time range commands
Time of day commands
Script control commands
System time commands
System synchronization commands
Generic commands
System administration commands
System alarm contact commands
Redundancy commands
System port LAG MAC assignment commands for 7210 SAS-Mxp standalone, 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE standalone, and 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE: standalone and standalone-VC
Rollback commands
Peer commands
MC-LAG commands
LLDP system commands
LLDP Ethernet port commands
System resource-profile commands
Global system resource profile commands
Show commands
System commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Appendix: 7210 SAS boot procedures
Procedure to boot using auto-init mode
Procedures to boot using manual mode
Procedure to boot from the image on flash in manual mode
Procedure to boot from the network in manual mode using uplink ports
Procedure to boot from the network in manual mode using the OOB Ethernet management port
Procedure to boot when the BOF is present locally
Procedure to boot in the satellite mode
Procedure to boot in the standalone-VC mode
Standards and protocol support
Customer Documentation and Product Support
7210 SAS-D, Dxp, K 2F1C2T, K 2F6C4T, K 3SFP+ 8C Interface Configuration Guide Release 22.9.R1
Legal notice
Getting started
About this guide
Document structure and content
7210 SAS modes of operation
7210 SAS port modes
Interface configuration process
Conventions
Precautionary and information messages
Options or substeps in procedures and sequential workflows
7210 SAS interfaces
Configuration overview
Chassis slots and cards
Digital Diagnostics Monitoring
SFPs and XFPs
Statistics collection
Ports
Port types
Port modes
Port dot1q VLAN Etype on 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Configuration guidelines for dot1q-Etype for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
Support for power over Ethernet
PoE configuration notes
MACsec
MACsec 802.1AE header (SecTAG)
MACsec encryption mode
MACsec encryption per traffic flow encapsulation matching
MACsec terminology
MACsec key management modes
MACsec static CAK
SAK rollover
MKA
MKA PDU generation
Tags in clear behavior by traffic encapsulation types
PSK
MKA hello timer
MACsec capability, desire, and encryption offset
Key server
SA limits and network design
P2P (switch-to-switch) topology
P2MP (switch to switch) topology
SA exhaustion behavior
Clear tag mode
802.1X tunneling and multihop MACsec
EAPoL destination address
Mirroring consideration
Ethernet combo ports on 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Link Layer Discovery Protocol
LLDP protocol features
LLDP tunneling for Epipe service
LLDP media endpoint discovery
LLDP-MED reference model
LLDP-MED network connectivity device functions
LLDP-MED endpoint device move notification
Modified use of TLVs defined in LLDP
Port loopback for Ethernet ports
Port loopback without MAC swap
Port loopback with MAC swap
Per-SAP loopback with MAC swap
LAG
LAG features
Configuring LAGs
LAG and QoS policies on 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
LAG and QoS policies on 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Port link damping
LACP
LAG and ECMP hashing
LAG hashing algorithm for the 7210 SAS-D
LAG hashing algorithm for the 7210 SAS-Dxp
LAG hashing algorithm for the 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
LAG hashing algorithm for the 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Packet fields used for pseudowire hash-label generation on the 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
LDP ECMP hashing algorithm for the 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Multi-Chassis LAG
Overview
Point-to-point redundant connection across Layer 2/3 VPN network
Configuration guidelines
Configuring multi-chassis redundancy
MC-LAG support on 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
G.8032 protected Ethernet rings
802.1x network access control
802.1x modes
802.1x basics
802.1x timers
802.1x configuration and limitations
802.1x tunneling for Epipe service
802.3ah OAM
OAM events
Remote loopback
802.3ah OAM PDU tunneling for Epipe service
MTU configuration guidelines
Default MTU values
Modifying MTU defaults on 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
Modifying MTU defaults on the 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Configuration example for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C using SAPs in the service
Modifying MTU defaults on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C when using SDP in the service
Deploying preprovisioned components
MAC authentication
MAC authentication basics
MAC authentication limitations
VLAN authentication
VLAN authentication basics
VLAN authentication limitations
Layer 2 control protocol interaction with authentication methods
Configuration process overview
Configuring physical ports with CLI
Preprovisioning guidelines
Predefining entities
Preprovisioning a port
Basic configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring Ethernet port parameters
Ethernet network port
Ethernet access-uplink port
Ethernet access port
Configuring 802.1x authentication port parameters
Configuring MAC authentication port parameters
Configuring VLAN authentication port parameters
Configuring LAG parameters
CRC error monitoring
Service management tasks
Modifying a card type
Deleting a card
Deleting port parameters
Card, MDA, and port command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Hardware commands
Port buffer pool configuration commands for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
Port configuration commands
Port configuration commands for PTP Port-based timestamp
Port-based split horizon group configuration commands for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
Port commands for reserving resources of ports on 7210 SAS-Dxp
MACsec commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C, and 7210 SAS-Dxp 24p
Ethernet commands
Port Ethernet QoS commands
Port Ethernet commands
Port Ethernet CRC monitoring commands for 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Port Ethernet 802.1x commands
Port Ethernet 802.1x MACsec commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Port Ethernet down-when-looped commands
Port Ethernet EFM OAM commands
Port Ethernet LLDP commands
Port Ethernet sync commands for 7210 SAS-D ETR, 7210 SAS-Dxp, 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
LAG commands for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
LAG commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Multi-chassis redundancy commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Ethernet ring commands
Show commands
MACsec show commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C, and 7210 SAS-Dxp 24p
Monitor commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Card commands
MDA commands
Interface QoS commands
General port commands
Port loopback commands
MACsec commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C, and 7210 SAS-Dxp 24p
Ethernet port commands
802.1x port commands
802.1x port MACsec commands
LLDP port commands
Access-uplink port commands
LAG commands
Multi-chassis redundancy commands
MC Endpoint commands
MC-LAG commands
Ethernet ring commands
Show commands
Hardware commands
Port show commands
LAG commands
MACsec show commands
Port monitor commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Standards and protocol support
Customer Documentation and Product Support
Legal notice
Getting started
About this guide
Document structure and content
7210 SAS modes of operation
7210 SAS port modes
Interface configuration process
Conventions
Precautionary and information messages
Options or substeps in procedures and sequential workflows
7210 SAS interfaces
Configuration overview
Chassis slots and cards
Digital Diagnostics Monitoring
SFPs and XFPs
Statistics collection
Ports
Port types
Port modes
Port dot1q VLAN Etype on 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Configuration guidelines for dot1q-Etype for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
Support for power over Ethernet
PoE configuration notes
MACsec
MACsec 802.1AE header (SecTAG)
MACsec encryption mode
MACsec encryption per traffic flow encapsulation matching
MACsec terminology
MACsec key management modes
MACsec static CAK
SAK rollover
MKA
MKA PDU generation
Tags in clear behavior by traffic encapsulation types
PSK
MKA hello timer
MACsec capability, desire, and encryption offset
Key server
SA limits and network design
P2P (switch-to-switch) topology
P2MP (switch to switch) topology
SA exhaustion behavior
Clear tag mode
802.1X tunneling and multihop MACsec
EAPoL destination address
Mirroring consideration
Ethernet combo ports on 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Link Layer Discovery Protocol
LLDP protocol features
LLDP tunneling for Epipe service
LLDP media endpoint discovery
LLDP-MED reference model
LLDP-MED network connectivity device functions
LLDP-MED endpoint device move notification
Modified use of TLVs defined in LLDP
Port loopback for Ethernet ports
Port loopback without MAC swap
Port loopback with MAC swap
Per-SAP loopback with MAC swap
LAG
LAG features
Configuring LAGs
LAG and QoS policies on 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
LAG and QoS policies on 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Port link damping
LACP
LAG and ECMP hashing
LAG hashing algorithm for the 7210 SAS-D
LAG hashing algorithm for the 7210 SAS-Dxp
LAG hashing algorithm for the 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
LAG hashing algorithm for the 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Packet fields used for pseudowire hash-label generation on the 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
LDP ECMP hashing algorithm for the 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Multi-Chassis LAG
Overview
Point-to-point redundant connection across Layer 2/3 VPN network
Configuration guidelines
Configuring multi-chassis redundancy
MC-LAG support on 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
G.8032 protected Ethernet rings
802.1x network access control
802.1x modes
802.1x basics
802.1x timers
802.1x configuration and limitations
802.1x tunneling for Epipe service
802.3ah OAM
OAM events
Remote loopback
802.3ah OAM PDU tunneling for Epipe service
MTU configuration guidelines
Default MTU values
Modifying MTU defaults on 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
Modifying MTU defaults on the 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Configuration example for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C using SAPs in the service
Modifying MTU defaults on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C when using SDP in the service
Deploying preprovisioned components
MAC authentication
MAC authentication basics
MAC authentication limitations
VLAN authentication
VLAN authentication basics
VLAN authentication limitations
Layer 2 control protocol interaction with authentication methods
Configuration process overview
Configuring physical ports with CLI
Preprovisioning guidelines
Predefining entities
Preprovisioning a port
Basic configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring Ethernet port parameters
Ethernet network port
Ethernet access-uplink port
Ethernet access port
Configuring 802.1x authentication port parameters
Configuring MAC authentication port parameters
Configuring VLAN authentication port parameters
Configuring LAG parameters
CRC error monitoring
Service management tasks
Modifying a card type
Deleting a card
Deleting port parameters
Card, MDA, and port command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Hardware commands
Port buffer pool configuration commands for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
Port configuration commands
Port configuration commands for PTP Port-based timestamp
Port-based split horizon group configuration commands for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
Port commands for reserving resources of ports on 7210 SAS-Dxp
MACsec commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C, and 7210 SAS-Dxp 24p
Ethernet commands
Port Ethernet QoS commands
Port Ethernet commands
Port Ethernet CRC monitoring commands for 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Port Ethernet 802.1x commands
Port Ethernet 802.1x MACsec commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Port Ethernet down-when-looped commands
Port Ethernet EFM OAM commands
Port Ethernet LLDP commands
Port Ethernet sync commands for 7210 SAS-D ETR, 7210 SAS-Dxp, 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
LAG commands for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
LAG commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Multi-chassis redundancy commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Ethernet ring commands
Show commands
MACsec show commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C, and 7210 SAS-Dxp 24p
Monitor commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Card commands
MDA commands
Interface QoS commands
General port commands
Port loopback commands
MACsec commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C, and 7210 SAS-Dxp 24p
Ethernet port commands
802.1x port commands
802.1x port MACsec commands
LLDP port commands
Access-uplink port commands
LAG commands
Multi-chassis redundancy commands
MC Endpoint commands
MC-LAG commands
Ethernet ring commands
Show commands
Hardware commands
Port show commands
LAG commands
MACsec show commands
Port monitor commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Standards and protocol support
Customer Documentation and Product Support
7210 SAS-Mxp, R6, R12, S, Sx, T Interface Configuration Guide Release 22.9.R1
Legal notice
Getting started
About this guide
Document structure and content
7210 SAS modes of operation
7210 SAS port modes
7210 SAS router configuration process
Conventions
Precautionary and information messages
Options or substeps in procedures and sequential workflows
7210 SAS interfaces
Configuration overview
Chassis slots and cards
MDAs
Digital Diagnostics Monitoring
SFPs and XFPs
Statistics collection
Ports
Port types
Port modes
Port dot1q VLAN Etype
Configuration guidelines for dot1q-etype
Support for Power over Ethernet
PoE configuration notes
Link Layer Discovery Protocol
LLDP protocol features
LLDP tunneling for Epipe service
LLDP media endpoint discovery
LLDP-MED reference model
LLDP-MED network connectivity device functions
LLDP-MED endpoint device move notification
Modified use of TLVs defined in LLDP
Port loopback for Ethernet ports
Port loopback without MAC swap
Port loopback with MAC swap
LAG
LAG features
Hardware capabilities
Software capabilities
Dynamic cost
LAG port threshold
Configuring LAGs
LAG on access
LAG and QoS policies on 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE, and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE
LAG and QoS policies on 7210 SAS-Mxp
LAG and QoS policies on 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
Port link damping
LACP
Active-standby LAG operation without LACP
LAG subgroups
LAG and ECMP hashing
LAG hashing for the 7210 SAS-T (network mode)
LAG hashing for the 7210 SAS-T (access-uplink mode)
LAG Hashing for the 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
LAG hashing for the 7210 SAS-Mxp
LAG hashing algorithm for the 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE in standalone and standalone-VC mode
PW hash-label generation for 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
PW hash-label – packet fields used for PW Hash-label generation for 7210 SAS-Mxp
PW Hash-label – packet fields used for PW hash-label generation for 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE
ECMP hashing for 7210 SAS devices in network mode
Bidirectional Forwarding Detection over LAG links
Configuration guidelines and restrictions for BFD over LAG links
Multi-chassis LAG
Overview
Point-to-point redundant connection across Layer 2/3 VPN network
DSLAM dual homing in Layer 2 network
Configuration guidelines
Configuring multi-chassis redundancy
G.8032 protected Ethernet rings
802.1x network access control
802.1x modes
802.1x basics
802.1x timers
802.1x configuration and limitations
802.1x tunneling for Epipe service
MAC authentication
MAC authentication basics
MAC authentication limitations
VLAN authentication
VLAN authentication basics
VLAN authentication limitations
Layer 2 control protocol interaction with authentication methods
802.3ah OAM
OAM events
Remote loopback
802.3ah OAM PDU tunneling for Epipe service
MTU configuration guidelines
Default MTU values
Deploying preprovisioned components on 7210 SAS
Deploying preprovisioned components for 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE, and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE.
Deploying preprovisioned components for 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
Configuration process overview
Configuring physical ports with CLI
Preprovisioning guidelines
Predefining entities
Preprovisioning a port
Basic configuration
Configuring cards and MDAs
Configuration notes for provisioning of cards
Configuration notes for provisioning of 7210 SAS-R6 IMMv2 (IMM-b) cards
Configuration notes for provisioning of 7210 SAS-R6 IMM-c cards
Common configuration tasks
Configuring ports
Configuring Ethernet port parameters
Ethernet network port
Ethernet access-uplink port
Ethernet access port
Configuring 802.1x authentication port parameters
Configuring MAC authentication port parameters
Configuring VLAN authentication port parameters
Configuring LAG parameters
Configuring BFD Over LAG links
Configuring access egress queue overrides
CRC error monitoring
Service management tasks
Modifying or deleting an MDA
Modifying a card type
Deleting a card
Deleting port parameters
Card, MDA, and port command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Hardware commands
MDA commands
Port configuration commands for PTP port-based timestamp
Port-based split horizon group configuration commands
Port configuration commands for DWDM Optics
Port loopback commands
Port QoS slope policy commands
Port Ethernet commands
General Port Ethernet commands
Port Ethernet QoS commands
Port Ethernet CRC Monitoring commands
Port Ethernet 802.1x commands
Port Ethernet Down-when-Looped commands
Port Ethernet EFM OAM commands
Port Ethernet LLDP commands
Port Ethernet sync commands
LAG commands
Multi-chassis redundancy commands
Ethernet ring commands
Show commands
Monitor commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Card commands
MDA commands
Interface QoS commands
General port commands
Port loopback commands
Ethernet port commands
802.1x port commands
LLDP Ethernet port commands
Port commands
LAG commands
Ethernet ring commands
Ethernet tunnel commands
Multi-chassis redundancy commands
MC Endpoint commands
MC LAG commands
Show commands
Hardware commands
Port Show commands
LAG commands
Port monitor commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Standards and protocol support
Customer Documentation and Product Support
Legal notice
Getting started
About this guide
Document structure and content
7210 SAS modes of operation
7210 SAS port modes
7210 SAS router configuration process
Conventions
Precautionary and information messages
Options or substeps in procedures and sequential workflows
7210 SAS interfaces
Configuration overview
Chassis slots and cards
MDAs
Digital Diagnostics Monitoring
SFPs and XFPs
Statistics collection
Ports
Port types
Port modes
Port dot1q VLAN Etype
Configuration guidelines for dot1q-etype
Support for Power over Ethernet
PoE configuration notes
Link Layer Discovery Protocol
LLDP protocol features
LLDP tunneling for Epipe service
LLDP media endpoint discovery
LLDP-MED reference model
LLDP-MED network connectivity device functions
LLDP-MED endpoint device move notification
Modified use of TLVs defined in LLDP
Port loopback for Ethernet ports
Port loopback without MAC swap
Port loopback with MAC swap
LAG
LAG features
Hardware capabilities
Software capabilities
Dynamic cost
LAG port threshold
Configuring LAGs
LAG on access
LAG and QoS policies on 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE, and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE
LAG and QoS policies on 7210 SAS-Mxp
LAG and QoS policies on 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
Port link damping
LACP
Active-standby LAG operation without LACP
LAG subgroups
LAG and ECMP hashing
LAG hashing for the 7210 SAS-T (network mode)
LAG hashing for the 7210 SAS-T (access-uplink mode)
LAG Hashing for the 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
LAG hashing for the 7210 SAS-Mxp
LAG hashing algorithm for the 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE in standalone and standalone-VC mode
PW hash-label generation for 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
PW hash-label – packet fields used for PW Hash-label generation for 7210 SAS-Mxp
PW Hash-label – packet fields used for PW hash-label generation for 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE
ECMP hashing for 7210 SAS devices in network mode
Bidirectional Forwarding Detection over LAG links
Configuration guidelines and restrictions for BFD over LAG links
Multi-chassis LAG
Overview
Point-to-point redundant connection across Layer 2/3 VPN network
DSLAM dual homing in Layer 2 network
Configuration guidelines
Configuring multi-chassis redundancy
G.8032 protected Ethernet rings
802.1x network access control
802.1x modes
802.1x basics
802.1x timers
802.1x configuration and limitations
802.1x tunneling for Epipe service
MAC authentication
MAC authentication basics
MAC authentication limitations
VLAN authentication
VLAN authentication basics
VLAN authentication limitations
Layer 2 control protocol interaction with authentication methods
802.3ah OAM
OAM events
Remote loopback
802.3ah OAM PDU tunneling for Epipe service
MTU configuration guidelines
Default MTU values
Deploying preprovisioned components on 7210 SAS
Deploying preprovisioned components for 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE, and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE.
Deploying preprovisioned components for 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
Configuration process overview
Configuring physical ports with CLI
Preprovisioning guidelines
Predefining entities
Preprovisioning a port
Basic configuration
Configuring cards and MDAs
Configuration notes for provisioning of cards
Configuration notes for provisioning of 7210 SAS-R6 IMMv2 (IMM-b) cards
Configuration notes for provisioning of 7210 SAS-R6 IMM-c cards
Common configuration tasks
Configuring ports
Configuring Ethernet port parameters
Ethernet network port
Ethernet access-uplink port
Ethernet access port
Configuring 802.1x authentication port parameters
Configuring MAC authentication port parameters
Configuring VLAN authentication port parameters
Configuring LAG parameters
Configuring BFD Over LAG links
Configuring access egress queue overrides
CRC error monitoring
Service management tasks
Modifying or deleting an MDA
Modifying a card type
Deleting a card
Deleting port parameters
Card, MDA, and port command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Hardware commands
MDA commands
Port configuration commands for PTP port-based timestamp
Port-based split horizon group configuration commands
Port configuration commands for DWDM Optics
Port loopback commands
Port QoS slope policy commands
Port Ethernet commands
General Port Ethernet commands
Port Ethernet QoS commands
Port Ethernet CRC Monitoring commands
Port Ethernet 802.1x commands
Port Ethernet Down-when-Looped commands
Port Ethernet EFM OAM commands
Port Ethernet LLDP commands
Port Ethernet sync commands
LAG commands
Multi-chassis redundancy commands
Ethernet ring commands
Show commands
Monitor commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Card commands
MDA commands
Interface QoS commands
General port commands
Port loopback commands
Ethernet port commands
802.1x port commands
LLDP Ethernet port commands
Port commands
LAG commands
Ethernet ring commands
Ethernet tunnel commands
Multi-chassis redundancy commands
MC Endpoint commands
MC LAG commands
Show commands
Hardware commands
Port Show commands
LAG commands
Port monitor commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Standards and protocol support
Customer Documentation and Product Support
7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, K 3SFP+ 8C MPLS Guide Release 22.9.R1
Legal notice
Getting started
About this guide
Document structure and content
7210 SAS modes of operation
7210 SAS port modes
Nokia 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C router configuration process
Conventions
Precautionary and information messages
Options or substeps in procedures and sequential workflows
MPLS and RSVP
MPLS
MPLS label stack
Label values
Label Switching Routers
LSP types
MPLS pseudowire hash label support
MPLS facility bypass method of MPLS Fast Re-Route (FRR)
Manual bypass LSP
PLR bypass LSP selection rules
FRR node-protection (facility)
Uniform FRR failover time
RSVP
Using RSVP for MPLS
RSVP Traffic Engineering extensions for MPLS
Hello protocol
MD5 authentication of RSVP interface
Reservation styles
RSVP message pacing
RSVP overhead refresh reduction
Configuring implicit null
Using unnumbered Point-to-Point interface in RSVP
Operation of RSVP FRR facility backup over unnumbered interface
PCEP support for RSVP-TE LSPs
MPLS Traffic Engineering
TE metric (IS-IS and OSPF)
Advanced MPLS/RSVP features
LSP path change
Manual LSP path switch
Make-Before-Break (MBB) procedures for LSP/Path parameter configuration change
Shared Risk Link Groups
Disjoint backup paths
Enabling disjoint backup paths for primary and standby SRLG disjoint configuration
Enabling disjoint backup paths for FRR detours and bypass SRLG disjoint configuration
Static configurations of SRLG memberships
TE graceful shutdown
MPLS/RSVP configuration process overview
Configuration notes
Configuring MPLS and RSVP with CLI
MPLS configuration overview
LSPs
Paths
Router interface
Choosing the signaling protocol
Basic MPLS configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring global MPLS parameters
Configuring an MPLS interface
Configuring MPLS paths
Configuring an MPLS LSP
Configuring a static LSP
Configuring manual bypass tunnels
Configuring RSVP parameters
Configuring RSVP message pacing parameters
Configuring graceful shutdown
MPLS configuration management tasks
Modifying MPLS parameters
Modifying an MPLS LSP
Modifying MPLS path parameters
Modifying MPLS static LSP parameters
Deleting an MPLS interface
RSVP configuration management tasks
Modifying RSVP parameters
Modifying RSVP message pacing parameters
Deleting an interface from RSVP
MPLS/RSVP command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
MPLS commands
MPLS LSP commands
MPLS Path commands
RSVP commands
Show commands
Tools commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
MPLS configuration commands
Generic commands
MPLS commands
MPLS interface commands
LSP commands
Primary and secondary path commands
LSP path commands
Static LSP commands
RSVP configuration commands
Generic commands
RSVP commands
Interface commands
Message pacing commands
Show commands
Show MPLS commands
Show RSVP commands
Tools commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Label Distribution Protocol
Label Distribution Protocol
LDP and MPLS
LDP architecture
Subsystem interrelationships
Memory manager and LDP
Label manager
LDP configuration
Logger
Service manager
Execution flow
Initialization
Session lifetime
Adjacency establishment
Session establishment
Label exchange
Other reasons for label actions
Cleanup
Configuring implicit null label
Global LDP filters
Per LDP peer FEC import and export policies
ECMP support for LDP
Label operations
Unnumbered interface support in LDP
Feature configuration
Operation of LDP over an unnumbered IP interface
Link LDP
Targeted LDP
FEC resolution
LDP Fast-Reroute for IS-IS and OSPF prefixes
LDP FRR configuration
Reducing the scope of the LFA calculation by SPF
LDP FRR procedures
Link LDP Hello adjacency tracking with BFD
LDP FRR and RSVP shortcut (IGP shortcut)
IS-IS and OSPF support for Loop-Free Alternate calculation
Loop-Free Alternate calculation in the presence of IGP shortcuts
Loop-Free Alternate Shortest Path First (LFA SPF) policies
Multi-area and Multi-instance extensions to LDP
LDP process overview
Configuring LDP with CLI
LDP configuration overview
Basic LDP configuration
Common configuration tasks
Enabling LDP
Configuring graceful-restart helper parameters
Applying export and import policies
Targeted session parameters
Interface parameters
Session parameters
LDP signaling and services
LDP configuration management tasks
Disabling LDP
Modifying targeted session parameters
Modifying interface parameters
LDP command reference
Command hierarchies
LDP commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Tools commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
LDP global commands
Session parameters commands
Targeted session commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Tools commands
PCEP
Introduction to PCEP
Base implementation of PCE
PCEP session establishment and maintenance
PCEP parameters
PCC configuration
LSP initiation
PCC-initiated and PCE-computed or PCE-controlled LSPs
PCEP support for RSVP-TE LSPs
RSVP-TE LSP configuration for a PCC router
Behavior of the LSP path update
Path update with empty ERO
Behavior of LSP MBB
PCC-controlled LSPs
PCE-computed LSPs
PCE-controlled LSPs
Behavior of secondary LSP paths
PCE path profile support
LSP path diversity and bidirectionality constraints
PCEP configuration command reference
Command hierarchies
PCEP commands
Show commands
Tools commands
Command descriptions
PCEP commands
Show commands
Tools commands
Standards and protocol support
Customer Documentation and Product Support
Legal notice
Getting started
About this guide
Document structure and content
7210 SAS modes of operation
7210 SAS port modes
Nokia 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C router configuration process
Conventions
Precautionary and information messages
Options or substeps in procedures and sequential workflows
MPLS and RSVP
MPLS
MPLS label stack
Label values
Label Switching Routers
LSP types
MPLS pseudowire hash label support
MPLS facility bypass method of MPLS Fast Re-Route (FRR)
Manual bypass LSP
PLR bypass LSP selection rules
FRR node-protection (facility)
Uniform FRR failover time
RSVP
Using RSVP for MPLS
RSVP Traffic Engineering extensions for MPLS
Hello protocol
MD5 authentication of RSVP interface
Reservation styles
RSVP message pacing
RSVP overhead refresh reduction
Configuring implicit null
Using unnumbered Point-to-Point interface in RSVP
Operation of RSVP FRR facility backup over unnumbered interface
PCEP support for RSVP-TE LSPs
MPLS Traffic Engineering
TE metric (IS-IS and OSPF)
Advanced MPLS/RSVP features
LSP path change
Manual LSP path switch
Make-Before-Break (MBB) procedures for LSP/Path parameter configuration change
Shared Risk Link Groups
Disjoint backup paths
Enabling disjoint backup paths for primary and standby SRLG disjoint configuration
Enabling disjoint backup paths for FRR detours and bypass SRLG disjoint configuration
Static configurations of SRLG memberships
TE graceful shutdown
MPLS/RSVP configuration process overview
Configuration notes
Configuring MPLS and RSVP with CLI
MPLS configuration overview
LSPs
Paths
Router interface
Choosing the signaling protocol
Basic MPLS configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring global MPLS parameters
Configuring an MPLS interface
Configuring MPLS paths
Configuring an MPLS LSP
Configuring a static LSP
Configuring manual bypass tunnels
Configuring RSVP parameters
Configuring RSVP message pacing parameters
Configuring graceful shutdown
MPLS configuration management tasks
Modifying MPLS parameters
Modifying an MPLS LSP
Modifying MPLS path parameters
Modifying MPLS static LSP parameters
Deleting an MPLS interface
RSVP configuration management tasks
Modifying RSVP parameters
Modifying RSVP message pacing parameters
Deleting an interface from RSVP
MPLS/RSVP command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
MPLS commands
MPLS LSP commands
MPLS Path commands
RSVP commands
Show commands
Tools commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
MPLS configuration commands
Generic commands
MPLS commands
MPLS interface commands
LSP commands
Primary and secondary path commands
LSP path commands
Static LSP commands
RSVP configuration commands
Generic commands
RSVP commands
Interface commands
Message pacing commands
Show commands
Show MPLS commands
Show RSVP commands
Tools commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Label Distribution Protocol
Label Distribution Protocol
LDP and MPLS
LDP architecture
Subsystem interrelationships
Memory manager and LDP
Label manager
LDP configuration
Logger
Service manager
Execution flow
Initialization
Session lifetime
Adjacency establishment
Session establishment
Label exchange
Other reasons for label actions
Cleanup
Configuring implicit null label
Global LDP filters
Per LDP peer FEC import and export policies
ECMP support for LDP
Label operations
Unnumbered interface support in LDP
Feature configuration
Operation of LDP over an unnumbered IP interface
Link LDP
Targeted LDP
FEC resolution
LDP Fast-Reroute for IS-IS and OSPF prefixes
LDP FRR configuration
Reducing the scope of the LFA calculation by SPF
LDP FRR procedures
Link LDP Hello adjacency tracking with BFD
LDP FRR and RSVP shortcut (IGP shortcut)
IS-IS and OSPF support for Loop-Free Alternate calculation
Loop-Free Alternate calculation in the presence of IGP shortcuts
Loop-Free Alternate Shortest Path First (LFA SPF) policies
Multi-area and Multi-instance extensions to LDP
LDP process overview
Configuring LDP with CLI
LDP configuration overview
Basic LDP configuration
Common configuration tasks
Enabling LDP
Configuring graceful-restart helper parameters
Applying export and import policies
Targeted session parameters
Interface parameters
Session parameters
LDP signaling and services
LDP configuration management tasks
Disabling LDP
Modifying targeted session parameters
Modifying interface parameters
LDP command reference
Command hierarchies
LDP commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Tools commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
LDP global commands
Session parameters commands
Targeted session commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Tools commands
PCEP
Introduction to PCEP
Base implementation of PCE
PCEP session establishment and maintenance
PCEP parameters
PCC configuration
LSP initiation
PCC-initiated and PCE-computed or PCE-controlled LSPs
PCEP support for RSVP-TE LSPs
RSVP-TE LSP configuration for a PCC router
Behavior of the LSP path update
Path update with empty ERO
Behavior of LSP MBB
PCC-controlled LSPs
PCE-computed LSPs
PCE-controlled LSPs
Behavior of secondary LSP paths
PCE path profile support
LSP path diversity and bidirectionality constraints
PCEP configuration command reference
Command hierarchies
PCEP commands
Show commands
Tools commands
Command descriptions
PCEP commands
Show commands
Tools commands
Standards and protocol support
Customer Documentation and Product Support
7210 SAS-Mxp, R6, R12, S, Sx, T MPLS Guide Release 22.9.R1
Legal notice
Getting started
About this guide
Document structure and content
7210 SAS modes of operation
7210 SAS port modes
7210 SAS router configuration process
Conventions
Precautionary and information messages
Options or substeps in procedures and sequential workflows
MPLS and RSVP
MPLS
MPLS label stack
Label values
Label Switching Routers
LSP types
MPLS Fast Re-Route (FRR)
Manual bypass LSP
PLR bypass LSP selection rules
FRR node-protection (facility)
Uniform FRR failover time
Configuration guidelines
MPLS pseudowire hash label support
MPLS Transport Profile (MPLS-TP)
MPLS-TP model
MPLS-TP provider edge and gateway
VLL services
Detailed descriptions of MPLS-TP
MPLS-TP LSPs
MPLS-TP on pseudowires
MPLS-TP maintenance identifiers
Generic Associated Channel
MPLS-TP Operations, Administration and Maintenance (OAM)
On-demand connectivity verification (CV) using LSP-Ping
Proactive CC, CV and RDI
BFD-based RDI
PW control channel status notifications (static pseudowire status signaling)
Pseudowire redundancy and active / standby dual-homing
MPLS-TP LSP protection
Configuring MPLS-TP
Configuration overview
Node-wide MPLS-TP parameter configuration
Node-wide MPLS-TP identifier configuration
Static LSP and pseudowire (VC) label and tunnel ranges
Interface configuration for MPLS-TP
LER configuration for MPLS-TP
LSP and path configuration
Proactive CC/CV (using BFD) configuration
Protection templates and linear protection configuration
Intermediate LSR configuration for MPLS-TP LSPs
RSVP
Using RSVP for MPLS
RSVP Traffic Engineering extensions for MPLS
Hello protocol
MD5 authentication of RSVP interface
Reservation styles
RSVP message pacing
RSVP overhead refresh reduction
Configuring implicit null
Using unnumbered Point-to-Point interface in RSVP
Operation of RSVP FRR facility backup over unnumbered interface
PCEP support for RSVP-TE LSPs
Traffic Engineering
TE metric (IS-IS and OSPF)
Maintenance of TE links and nodes
Admin-group support on facility bypass backup LSP
Procedures at head-end node
Procedures at PLR node
Manual and timer resignal of RSVP-TE bypass LSP
RSVP-TE bypass LSP path SRLG information update in manual and timer resignal MBB
RSVP-TE bypass LSP path administrative group information update in manual and timer resignal MBB
Advanced MPLS/RSVP features
Shared Risk Link Groups
Enabling disjoint backup paths
Static configurations of SRLG memberships
TE graceful shutdown
Inter-area TE LSP (ERO expansion method)
Automatic ABR node selection for inter-area LSP
Rerouting of inter-area LSP
Behavior of MPLS options in inter-area LSP
Inter-area LSP support of OSPF virtual links
Area border node FRR protection for inter-area LSP
Point-to-Multipoint (P2MP) LSP
Application in video broadcast
P2MP LSP data plane
Procedures at ingress LER node
Procedures at LSR node
Procedures at branch LSR node
Procedures at egress LER node
Procedures at BUD LSR node
RSVP control plane in a P2MP LSP
Forwarding multicast packets over RSVP P2MP LSP in the base router
Procedures at ingress LER node
Procedures with a primary tunnel at egress LER node
Configuration guidelines for RSVP P2MP LSPs
MPLS/RSVP configuration process overview
Configuration notes
Configuring MPLS and RSVP with CLI
MPLS configuration overview
LSPs
Paths
Router interface
Choosing the signaling protocol
Basic MPLS configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring global MPLS parameters
Configuring an MPLS interface
Configuring MPLS paths
Configuring an MPLS LSP
Configuring a static LSP
Configuring manual bypass tunnels
Configuring RSVP parameters
Configuring RSVP message pacing parameters
Configuring graceful shutdown
MPLS configuration management tasks
Modifying MPLS parameters
Modifying an MPLS LSP
Modifying MPLS path parameters
Modifying MPLS static LSP parameters
Deleting an MPLS interface
RSVP configuration management tasks
Modifying RSVP parameters
Modifying RSVP message pacing parameters
Deleting an interface from RSVP
MPLS/RSVP command reference
Command hierarchies
MPLS commands
MPLS-TP commands
MPLS LSP commands
MPLS-TP LSP commands
MPLS path commands
RSVP commands
Show commands
Tools commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
MPLS configuration commands
Generic commands
MPLS commands
MPLS label commands
MPLS interface commands
MPLS-TP commands
LSP commands
Primary and secondary path commands
LSP path commands
Static LSP commands
RSVP configuration commands
Generic commands
RSVP commands
Interface commands
Message pacing commands
Show commands
Show MPLS commands
Show RSVP commands
Tools commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Label Distribution Protocol
Label Distribution Protocol
LDP and MPLS
LDP architecture
Subsystem interrelationships
Memory manager and LDP
Label manager
LDP configuration
Logger
Service manager
Execution flow
Initialization
Session lifetime
Session establishment
Label exchange
Other reasons for label actions
Cleanup
Configuring implicit null label
LDP filters
ECMP support for LDP
Label operations
LDP LSR ECMP hashing
Link LDP
Targeted LDP
Unnumbered interface support in LDP
Feature configuration
Operation of LDP over an unnumbered IP interface
Link LDP
Targeted LDP
FEC resolution
LDP over RSVP tunnels
Signaling and operation
LDP label distribution and FEC resolution
Default FEC resolution procedure
FEC resolution procedure when prefer-tunnel-in-tunnel is enabled
Rerouting around failures
LDP-over-RSVP tunnel protection
ABR protection
T-LDP session tracking using BFD
LDP Downstream-on-Demand (DoD)
Single-hop LDP DoD procedures
LDP over RSVP and ECMP
LDP Fast-Reroute for IS-IS and OSPF prefixes
LDP FRR configuration
Reducing the scope of the LFA calculation by SPF
LDP FRR procedures
Link LDP Hello adjacency tracking with BFD
ECMP considerations
LDP P2MP support
LDP P2MP configuration
LDP P2MP protocol
Configuration guidelines for P2MP LSPs
IS-IS and OSPF support for Loop-Free Alternate calculation
Loop-Free Alternate calculation for inter-area/inter-level prefixes
Loop-Free Alternate Shortest Path First (LFA SPF) policies
Multi-area and multi-instance extensions to LDP
LDP IPv6 control and data planes
LDP Operation in an IPv6 Network
Link LDP
Targeted LDP
FEC resolution
Resources required to trap LDP control packets to the CPU
LDP session capabilities
LDP adjacency capabilities
Address and FEC distribution
Controlling IPv6 FEC distribution during an upgrade to 7210 SAS SR OS supporting LDP IPv6
Handling of duplicate link-local IPv6 addresses in FEC resolution
IGP and static route synchronization with LDP
BFD operation
Services using SDP with an LDP IPv6 FEC
OAM Support with LDP IPv6
Configuration guidelines for LDP IPv6 OAM tools
LDP IPv6 Interoperability Considerations
Interoperability with implementations compliant with RFC 7552
Interoperability with implementations compliant with RFC 5036 for IPv4 LDP control plane only
LDP process overview
Configuring LDP with CLI
LDP configuration overview
Basic LDP configuration
Common configuration tasks
Enabling LDP
Configuring FEC originate parameters
Configuring graceful-restart helper parameters
Applying export and import policies
Targeted session parameters
Interface parameters
Peer parameters
LDP signaling and services
LDP configuration management tasks
Disabling LDP
Modifying targeted session parameters
Modifying interface parameters
LDP command reference
Command hierarchies
LDP commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
LDP configuration commands
Generic commands
LDP global commands
Session parameters commands
Targeted session commands
TCP session parameters commands
Show LDP commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
PCEP
Introduction to PCEP
Base implementation of PCE
PCEP session establishment and maintenance
PCEP parameters
PCC configuration
LSP initiation
PCC-initiated and PCE-computed or PCE-controlled LSPs
PCEP support for RSVP-TE LSPs
RSVP-TE LSP configuration for a PCC router
Behavior of the LSP path update
Path update with empty ERO
Behavior of LSP MBB
PCC-controlled LSPs
PCE-computed LSPs
PCE-controlled LSPs
Behavior of secondary LSP Paths
PCE path profile support
LSP path diversity and bidirectionality constraints
PCEP configuration command reference
Command hierarchies
PCEP commands
Show commands
Tools commands
Command descriptions
PCEP commands
Show commands
Tools commands
Standards and protocol support
Customer Documentation and Product Support
Legal notice
Getting started
About this guide
Document structure and content
7210 SAS modes of operation
7210 SAS port modes
7210 SAS router configuration process
Conventions
Precautionary and information messages
Options or substeps in procedures and sequential workflows
MPLS and RSVP
MPLS
MPLS label stack
Label values
Label Switching Routers
LSP types
MPLS Fast Re-Route (FRR)
Manual bypass LSP
PLR bypass LSP selection rules
FRR node-protection (facility)
Uniform FRR failover time
Configuration guidelines
MPLS pseudowire hash label support
MPLS Transport Profile (MPLS-TP)
MPLS-TP model
MPLS-TP provider edge and gateway
VLL services
Detailed descriptions of MPLS-TP
MPLS-TP LSPs
MPLS-TP on pseudowires
MPLS-TP maintenance identifiers
Generic Associated Channel
MPLS-TP Operations, Administration and Maintenance (OAM)
On-demand connectivity verification (CV) using LSP-Ping
Proactive CC, CV and RDI
BFD-based RDI
PW control channel status notifications (static pseudowire status signaling)
Pseudowire redundancy and active / standby dual-homing
MPLS-TP LSP protection
Configuring MPLS-TP
Configuration overview
Node-wide MPLS-TP parameter configuration
Node-wide MPLS-TP identifier configuration
Static LSP and pseudowire (VC) label and tunnel ranges
Interface configuration for MPLS-TP
LER configuration for MPLS-TP
LSP and path configuration
Proactive CC/CV (using BFD) configuration
Protection templates and linear protection configuration
Intermediate LSR configuration for MPLS-TP LSPs
RSVP
Using RSVP for MPLS
RSVP Traffic Engineering extensions for MPLS
Hello protocol
MD5 authentication of RSVP interface
Reservation styles
RSVP message pacing
RSVP overhead refresh reduction
Configuring implicit null
Using unnumbered Point-to-Point interface in RSVP
Operation of RSVP FRR facility backup over unnumbered interface
PCEP support for RSVP-TE LSPs
Traffic Engineering
TE metric (IS-IS and OSPF)
Maintenance of TE links and nodes
Admin-group support on facility bypass backup LSP
Procedures at head-end node
Procedures at PLR node
Manual and timer resignal of RSVP-TE bypass LSP
RSVP-TE bypass LSP path SRLG information update in manual and timer resignal MBB
RSVP-TE bypass LSP path administrative group information update in manual and timer resignal MBB
Advanced MPLS/RSVP features
Shared Risk Link Groups
Enabling disjoint backup paths
Static configurations of SRLG memberships
TE graceful shutdown
Inter-area TE LSP (ERO expansion method)
Automatic ABR node selection for inter-area LSP
Rerouting of inter-area LSP
Behavior of MPLS options in inter-area LSP
Inter-area LSP support of OSPF virtual links
Area border node FRR protection for inter-area LSP
Point-to-Multipoint (P2MP) LSP
Application in video broadcast
P2MP LSP data plane
Procedures at ingress LER node
Procedures at LSR node
Procedures at branch LSR node
Procedures at egress LER node
Procedures at BUD LSR node
RSVP control plane in a P2MP LSP
Forwarding multicast packets over RSVP P2MP LSP in the base router
Procedures at ingress LER node
Procedures with a primary tunnel at egress LER node
Configuration guidelines for RSVP P2MP LSPs
MPLS/RSVP configuration process overview
Configuration notes
Configuring MPLS and RSVP with CLI
MPLS configuration overview
LSPs
Paths
Router interface
Choosing the signaling protocol
Basic MPLS configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring global MPLS parameters
Configuring an MPLS interface
Configuring MPLS paths
Configuring an MPLS LSP
Configuring a static LSP
Configuring manual bypass tunnels
Configuring RSVP parameters
Configuring RSVP message pacing parameters
Configuring graceful shutdown
MPLS configuration management tasks
Modifying MPLS parameters
Modifying an MPLS LSP
Modifying MPLS path parameters
Modifying MPLS static LSP parameters
Deleting an MPLS interface
RSVP configuration management tasks
Modifying RSVP parameters
Modifying RSVP message pacing parameters
Deleting an interface from RSVP
MPLS/RSVP command reference
Command hierarchies
MPLS commands
MPLS-TP commands
MPLS LSP commands
MPLS-TP LSP commands
MPLS path commands
RSVP commands
Show commands
Tools commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
MPLS configuration commands
Generic commands
MPLS commands
MPLS label commands
MPLS interface commands
MPLS-TP commands
LSP commands
Primary and secondary path commands
LSP path commands
Static LSP commands
RSVP configuration commands
Generic commands
RSVP commands
Interface commands
Message pacing commands
Show commands
Show MPLS commands
Show RSVP commands
Tools commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Label Distribution Protocol
Label Distribution Protocol
LDP and MPLS
LDP architecture
Subsystem interrelationships
Memory manager and LDP
Label manager
LDP configuration
Logger
Service manager
Execution flow
Initialization
Session lifetime
Session establishment
Label exchange
Other reasons for label actions
Cleanup
Configuring implicit null label
LDP filters
ECMP support for LDP
Label operations
LDP LSR ECMP hashing
Link LDP
Targeted LDP
Unnumbered interface support in LDP
Feature configuration
Operation of LDP over an unnumbered IP interface
Link LDP
Targeted LDP
FEC resolution
LDP over RSVP tunnels
Signaling and operation
LDP label distribution and FEC resolution
Default FEC resolution procedure
FEC resolution procedure when prefer-tunnel-in-tunnel is enabled
Rerouting around failures
LDP-over-RSVP tunnel protection
ABR protection
T-LDP session tracking using BFD
LDP Downstream-on-Demand (DoD)
Single-hop LDP DoD procedures
LDP over RSVP and ECMP
LDP Fast-Reroute for IS-IS and OSPF prefixes
LDP FRR configuration
Reducing the scope of the LFA calculation by SPF
LDP FRR procedures
Link LDP Hello adjacency tracking with BFD
ECMP considerations
LDP P2MP support
LDP P2MP configuration
LDP P2MP protocol
Configuration guidelines for P2MP LSPs
IS-IS and OSPF support for Loop-Free Alternate calculation
Loop-Free Alternate calculation for inter-area/inter-level prefixes
Loop-Free Alternate Shortest Path First (LFA SPF) policies
Multi-area and multi-instance extensions to LDP
LDP IPv6 control and data planes
LDP Operation in an IPv6 Network
Link LDP
Targeted LDP
FEC resolution
Resources required to trap LDP control packets to the CPU
LDP session capabilities
LDP adjacency capabilities
Address and FEC distribution
Controlling IPv6 FEC distribution during an upgrade to 7210 SAS SR OS supporting LDP IPv6
Handling of duplicate link-local IPv6 addresses in FEC resolution
IGP and static route synchronization with LDP
BFD operation
Services using SDP with an LDP IPv6 FEC
OAM Support with LDP IPv6
Configuration guidelines for LDP IPv6 OAM tools
LDP IPv6 Interoperability Considerations
Interoperability with implementations compliant with RFC 7552
Interoperability with implementations compliant with RFC 5036 for IPv4 LDP control plane only
LDP process overview
Configuring LDP with CLI
LDP configuration overview
Basic LDP configuration
Common configuration tasks
Enabling LDP
Configuring FEC originate parameters
Configuring graceful-restart helper parameters
Applying export and import policies
Targeted session parameters
Interface parameters
Peer parameters
LDP signaling and services
LDP configuration management tasks
Disabling LDP
Modifying targeted session parameters
Modifying interface parameters
LDP command reference
Command hierarchies
LDP commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
LDP configuration commands
Generic commands
LDP global commands
Session parameters commands
Targeted session commands
TCP session parameters commands
Show LDP commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
PCEP
Introduction to PCEP
Base implementation of PCE
PCEP session establishment and maintenance
PCEP parameters
PCC configuration
LSP initiation
PCC-initiated and PCE-computed or PCE-controlled LSPs
PCEP support for RSVP-TE LSPs
RSVP-TE LSP configuration for a PCC router
Behavior of the LSP path update
Path update with empty ERO
Behavior of LSP MBB
PCC-controlled LSPs
PCE-computed LSPs
PCE-controlled LSPs
Behavior of secondary LSP Paths
PCE path profile support
LSP path diversity and bidirectionality constraints
PCEP configuration command reference
Command hierarchies
PCEP commands
Show commands
Tools commands
Command descriptions
PCEP commands
Show commands
Tools commands
Standards and protocol support
Customer Documentation and Product Support
7210 SAS-D, Dxp, K 2F1C2T, K 2F6C4T, K 3SFP+ 8C OAM and Diagnostics Guide Release 22.9.R1
Legal notice
Getting started
About this guide
Document structure and content
7210 SAS modes of operation
7210 SAS port modes
OAM configuration process
Conventions
Precautionary and information messages
Options or substeps in procedures and sequential workflows
Mirror services
Service mirroring
Mirror implementation
Mirror sources and destinations
Local and remote mirroring
Mirroring performance
Mirroring configuration
Configuration process overview
Configuration guidelines
Configuring service mirroring with CLI
Mirror configuration overview
Defining mirrored traffic
Basic mirroring configuration
Mirror classification rules
Port
SAP
MAC filter
IP filter
Common configuration tasks
Configuring a local mirror service
Configuring a remote mirror service
Service management tasks
Modifying a local mirrored service
Deleting a local mirrored service
Mirror service command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Mirror configuration commands for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
Mirror configuration commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
Mirror configuration commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Show commands
Debug commands
Command Descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Mirror destination configuration commands
Show commands
Debug commands
OAM and SAA
OAM overview
LSP diagnostics: LSP ping and trace
LSP ping/trace for an LSP using a BGP IPv4 label route
ECMP considerations
LSP ping and LSP trace over unnumbered IP interface
Downstream Detailed Mapping (DDMAP) TLV
Using DDMAP TLV in LSP stitching and LSP hierarchy
Responder node procedures
Sender node procedures
MPLS OAM support in segment routing
SR extensions for LSP-PING and LSP-TRACE
Operating guidelines on SR-ISIS or SR-OSPF tunnels
Operating guidelines on SR-ISIS tunnel stitched to LDP FEC
Operation on a BGP IPv4 LSP resolved over an SR-ISIS IPv4 tunnel or an SR-OSPF IPv4 tunnel
SDP diagnostics
SDP ping
SDP MTU path discovery
Service diagnostics
VPLS MAC diagnostics
MAC ping
MAC trace
CPE ping
MAC populate
MAC purge
VLL diagnostics
VCCV ping
VCCV ping application
VCCV ping in a multi-segment pseudowire
Automated VCCV-trace capability for MS-pseudowire
VCCV for static pseudowire segments
Detailed VCCV-trace operation
Control plane processing of a VCCV echo message in a MS-pseudo-wire
Sending a VCCV echo request
Receiving a VCCV echo request
Receiving a VCCV echo reply
IP performance monitoring
Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol
Configuration notes
Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol Light
Ethernet Connectivity Fault Management
ETH-CFM building blocks
Loopback
Linktrace
Continuity Check (CC)
Alarm Indication Signal (ETH-AIS Y.1731)
Test (ETH-TST Y.1731)
Y.1731 timestamp capability
One-way delay measurement (ETH-1DM Y.1731)
Two-way delay measurement (ETH-DMM Y.1731)
ITU-T Y.1731 Ethernet Bandwidth Notification
Port-based MEPs
ETH-CFM statistics
Synthetic Loss Measurement (ETH-SL)
Configuration example
ETH-CFM QoS considerations
ETH-CFM configuration guidelines
OAM mapping
CFM connectivity fault conditions
CFM fault propagation methods
Epipe services
CFM detected fault
Service down
LLF and CFM fault propagation
802.3ah EFM OAM mapping and interaction with service manager
Fault propagation to access dot1q/QinQ ports with access-uplink ports
Configuring fault propagation
Configuration example for fault propagation using oper-group
Fault propagation to access port using CFM on uplinks
Configuring an operational group for fault propagation
Fault propagation restrictions
Service Assurance Agent overview
Traceroute implementation
NTP
Ethernet CFM
Writing SAA results to accounting files
Accounting file management
Assigning SAA to an accounting file ID
Continuous testing
Configuring SAA test parameters
Y.1564 testhead OAM tool
Prerequisites for using the testhead tool
Generic prerequisites for use of the Y.1564 testhead OAM tool (applicable to all 7210 SAS platforms)
Service test testhead OAM Tool for the 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Ethernet frame size specification
Configuration guidelines
Configuring testhead tool parameters
Allocating CAM resources for the OAM testhead tool on the 7210 SAS-D
Loopback ports on the 7210 SAS-D
Configuring the testhead profile for the OAM testhead tool
Starting the testhead test and displaying results
Configuring service test OAM testhead tool parameters
Port loopback for Ethernet ports
SAP loopback for Ethernet SAPs
OAM Performance Monitoring (OAM-PM)
Session
Standard PM packets
Measurement intervals
Data structures and storage
Bin groups
Relating the components
Monitoring
Accounting policy configuration
ETH-CFM configuration
Service configuration
OAM-PM configuration
Show and monitor commands
Diagnostics command reference
Command hierarchies
OAM commands
Base operational commands
LSP diagnostics 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
LDP diagnostics for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
TWAMP commands for 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, and 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T
TWAMP Light commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
TWAMP Light commands for 7210 SAS-Dxp
SDP diagnostics for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
VPRN diagnostics for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
VLL diagnostics for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
VPLS MAC diagnostics for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Ethernet in the First Mile (EFM) commands
ETH CFM OAM commands
ETH CFM configuration commands
Y.1564 testhead profile commands for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
Y.1564 testhead profile commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T and 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T
Y.1564 service test testhead commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Y.1564 testhead OAM commands for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
Y.1564 testhead OAM commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T and 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T
OAM service test commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Show commands
Clear commands
OAM Performance Monitoring, bin group, and session commands
OAM-PM session IP commands for 7210 SAS-Dxp, 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
CFM command for DMM interop on 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
SAA commands
Show commands
Monitor commands
Clear commands for TWAMP for 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, and 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T
Clear commands
Command descriptions
Operational commands
Service diagnostics
VPLS MAC diagnostics
EFM commands
ETH-CFM OAM commands
ETH CFM configuration commands
Y.1564 test profile commands
OAM testhead commands
Y.1564 service test commands
OAM service test commands
OAM Performance Monitoring, bin group, and session commands
Service Assurance Agent (SAA) commands
OAM SAA commands
LDP diagnostics commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
LDP treetrace commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
TWAMP commands
TWAMP Light commands
Show commands
Monitor commands
Clear commands
Tools command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Dump commands
Dump commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Perform commands for 7210 SAS-D
Perform commands for 7210 SAS-Dxp, 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Dump commands
Service commands
Router commands
Perform commands
Tools dump command descriptions for the 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Dump router commands
Common CLI command descriptions
In this chapter
Command descriptions
SAP syntax
Port syntax
Standards and protocol support
Customer Documentation and Product Support
Legal notice
Getting started
About this guide
Document structure and content
7210 SAS modes of operation
7210 SAS port modes
OAM configuration process
Conventions
Precautionary and information messages
Options or substeps in procedures and sequential workflows
Mirror services
Service mirroring
Mirror implementation
Mirror sources and destinations
Local and remote mirroring
Mirroring performance
Mirroring configuration
Configuration process overview
Configuration guidelines
Configuring service mirroring with CLI
Mirror configuration overview
Defining mirrored traffic
Basic mirroring configuration
Mirror classification rules
Port
SAP
MAC filter
IP filter
Common configuration tasks
Configuring a local mirror service
Configuring a remote mirror service
Service management tasks
Modifying a local mirrored service
Deleting a local mirrored service
Mirror service command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Mirror configuration commands for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
Mirror configuration commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
Mirror configuration commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Show commands
Debug commands
Command Descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Mirror destination configuration commands
Show commands
Debug commands
OAM and SAA
OAM overview
LSP diagnostics: LSP ping and trace
LSP ping/trace for an LSP using a BGP IPv4 label route
ECMP considerations
LSP ping and LSP trace over unnumbered IP interface
Downstream Detailed Mapping (DDMAP) TLV
Using DDMAP TLV in LSP stitching and LSP hierarchy
Responder node procedures
Sender node procedures
MPLS OAM support in segment routing
SR extensions for LSP-PING and LSP-TRACE
Operating guidelines on SR-ISIS or SR-OSPF tunnels
Operating guidelines on SR-ISIS tunnel stitched to LDP FEC
Operation on a BGP IPv4 LSP resolved over an SR-ISIS IPv4 tunnel or an SR-OSPF IPv4 tunnel
SDP diagnostics
SDP ping
SDP MTU path discovery
Service diagnostics
VPLS MAC diagnostics
MAC ping
MAC trace
CPE ping
MAC populate
MAC purge
VLL diagnostics
VCCV ping
VCCV ping application
VCCV ping in a multi-segment pseudowire
Automated VCCV-trace capability for MS-pseudowire
VCCV for static pseudowire segments
Detailed VCCV-trace operation
Control plane processing of a VCCV echo message in a MS-pseudo-wire
Sending a VCCV echo request
Receiving a VCCV echo request
Receiving a VCCV echo reply
IP performance monitoring
Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol
Configuration notes
Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol Light
Ethernet Connectivity Fault Management
ETH-CFM building blocks
Loopback
Linktrace
Continuity Check (CC)
Alarm Indication Signal (ETH-AIS Y.1731)
Test (ETH-TST Y.1731)
Y.1731 timestamp capability
One-way delay measurement (ETH-1DM Y.1731)
Two-way delay measurement (ETH-DMM Y.1731)
ITU-T Y.1731 Ethernet Bandwidth Notification
Port-based MEPs
ETH-CFM statistics
Synthetic Loss Measurement (ETH-SL)
Configuration example
ETH-CFM QoS considerations
ETH-CFM configuration guidelines
OAM mapping
CFM connectivity fault conditions
CFM fault propagation methods
Epipe services
CFM detected fault
Service down
LLF and CFM fault propagation
802.3ah EFM OAM mapping and interaction with service manager
Fault propagation to access dot1q/QinQ ports with access-uplink ports
Configuring fault propagation
Configuration example for fault propagation using oper-group
Fault propagation to access port using CFM on uplinks
Configuring an operational group for fault propagation
Fault propagation restrictions
Service Assurance Agent overview
Traceroute implementation
NTP
Ethernet CFM
Writing SAA results to accounting files
Accounting file management
Assigning SAA to an accounting file ID
Continuous testing
Configuring SAA test parameters
Y.1564 testhead OAM tool
Prerequisites for using the testhead tool
Generic prerequisites for use of the Y.1564 testhead OAM tool (applicable to all 7210 SAS platforms)
Service test testhead OAM Tool for the 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Ethernet frame size specification
Configuration guidelines
Configuring testhead tool parameters
Allocating CAM resources for the OAM testhead tool on the 7210 SAS-D
Loopback ports on the 7210 SAS-D
Configuring the testhead profile for the OAM testhead tool
Starting the testhead test and displaying results
Configuring service test OAM testhead tool parameters
Port loopback for Ethernet ports
SAP loopback for Ethernet SAPs
OAM Performance Monitoring (OAM-PM)
Session
Standard PM packets
Measurement intervals
Data structures and storage
Bin groups
Relating the components
Monitoring
Accounting policy configuration
ETH-CFM configuration
Service configuration
OAM-PM configuration
Show and monitor commands
Diagnostics command reference
Command hierarchies
OAM commands
Base operational commands
LSP diagnostics 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
LDP diagnostics for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
TWAMP commands for 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, and 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T
TWAMP Light commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
TWAMP Light commands for 7210 SAS-Dxp
SDP diagnostics for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
VPRN diagnostics for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
VLL diagnostics for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
VPLS MAC diagnostics for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Ethernet in the First Mile (EFM) commands
ETH CFM OAM commands
ETH CFM configuration commands
Y.1564 testhead profile commands for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
Y.1564 testhead profile commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T and 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T
Y.1564 service test testhead commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Y.1564 testhead OAM commands for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
Y.1564 testhead OAM commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T and 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T
OAM service test commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Show commands
Clear commands
OAM Performance Monitoring, bin group, and session commands
OAM-PM session IP commands for 7210 SAS-Dxp, 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
CFM command for DMM interop on 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
SAA commands
Show commands
Monitor commands
Clear commands for TWAMP for 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, and 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T
Clear commands
Command descriptions
Operational commands
Service diagnostics
VPLS MAC diagnostics
EFM commands
ETH-CFM OAM commands
ETH CFM configuration commands
Y.1564 test profile commands
OAM testhead commands
Y.1564 service test commands
OAM service test commands
OAM Performance Monitoring, bin group, and session commands
Service Assurance Agent (SAA) commands
OAM SAA commands
LDP diagnostics commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
LDP treetrace commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
TWAMP commands
TWAMP Light commands
Show commands
Monitor commands
Clear commands
Tools command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Dump commands
Dump commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Perform commands for 7210 SAS-D
Perform commands for 7210 SAS-Dxp, 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Dump commands
Service commands
Router commands
Perform commands
Tools dump command descriptions for the 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Dump router commands
Common CLI command descriptions
In this chapter
Command descriptions
SAP syntax
Port syntax
Standards and protocol support
Customer Documentation and Product Support
7210 SAS-Mxp, R6, R12, S, Sx, T OAM and Diagnostics Guide Release 22.9.R1
Legal notice
Getting started
About this guide
Document structure and content
7210 SAS modes of operation
7210 SAS port modes
Nokia 7210 SAS services configuration process
Conventions
Precautionary and information messages
Options or substeps in procedures and sequential workflows
Mirror services
Service mirroring
Mirror implementation
Mirror source and destinations
Local and remote mirroring
Mirroring performance
Mirroring configuration
Configuration process overview
Configuration notes
Configuring service mirroring with CLI
Mirror configuration overview
Defining mirrored traffic
Basic mirroring configuration
Mirror classification rules
Port
SAP
MAC filter
IP filter
Common configuration tasks
Configuring a local mirror service
Configuring a remote mirror service
Service management tasks
Modifying a local mirrored service
Deleting a local mirrored service
Modifying a remote mirrored service
Deleting a remote mirrored service
Mirror service command reference
Command hierarchies
Mirror configuration commands for 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE, and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE in network mode
Mirror configuration commands for 7210 SAS devices configured in access-uplink mode
Mirror configuration commands for 7210 SAS-T in network mode, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE, 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE, 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12
Show commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Mirror destination configuration commands
Mirror source configuration commands
Show commands
OAM and SAA
OAM overview
LSP diagnostics: LSP ping and trace
LSP ping/trace for an LSP using a BGP IPv4 label route
ECMP considerations
LSP ping and LSP trace over unnumbered IP interface
Downstream Detailed Mapping (DDMAP) TLV
Using DDMAP TLV in LSP stitching and LSP hierarchy
Responder node procedures
Sender node procedures
MPLS OAM support in segment routing
SR extensions for LSP-PING and LSP-TRACE
Operating guidelines on SR-ISIS or SR-OSPF tunnels
Operating guidelines on SR-ISIS tunnel stitched to LDP FEC
Operation on a BGP IPv4 LSP resolved over an SR-ISIS IPv4 tunnel or an SR-OSPF IPv4 tunnel
LSP ping for RSVP P2MP LSP
LSP trace for RSVP P2MP LSP
LSP trace behavior when S2L path traverses a re-merge node
SDP diagnostics
SDP ping
SDP MTU path discovery
Service diagnostics
VPLS MAC diagnostics
MAC ping
MAC trace
CPE ping
MAC populate
MAC purge
VLL diagnostics
VCCV ping
VCCV-ping application
VCCV-ping in a multi-segment pseudowire
Automated VCCV-trace capability for MS-pseudowire
VCCV for static pseudowire segments
Detailed VCCV-trace operation
Control plane processing of a VCCV echo message in a MS-pseudowire
Sending a VCCV echo request
Receiving an VCCV echo request
Receiving an VCCV echo reply
MPLS-TP on-demand OAM commands
MPLS-TP pseudowires: VCCV-ping/VCCV-trace
MPLS-TP LSPs: LSP ping/LSP trace
MPLS-TP show commands
Static MPLS labels
MPLS-TP tunnel configuration
MPLS-TP path configuration
MPLS-TP protection
BFD
MPLS TP node configuration
MPLS-TP interfaces
Services using MPLS-TP PWs
MPLS-TP debug commands
IP Performance Monitoring (IP PM)
Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol (TWAMP)
Configuration notes
Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol Light (TWAMP Light)
Ethernet Connectivity Fault Management
ETH-CFM building blocks
Loopback
Linktrace
Continuity Check (CC)
Alarm Indication Signal (ETH-AIS Y.1731)
Test (ETH-TST Y.1731)
Y.1731 time stamp capability
ITU-T Y.1731 Ethernet Bandwidth Notification
ETH-BN configuration guidelines
Port-based MEPs
ETH-CFM statistics
Synthetic Loss Measurement (ETH-SL)
Configuration example
ETH-CFM QoS considerations
ETH-CFM configuration guidelines
OAM mapping
CFM connectivity fault conditions
CFM fault propagation methods
Epipe services
CFM detected fault
SAP/SDP-binding failure (including pseudowire status)
Service down
Interaction with pseudowire redundancy
LLF and CFM fault propagation
802.3ah EFM OAM mapping and interaction with service manager
Fault propagation to access dot1q/QinQ ports on the 7210 SAS-T in access-uplink mode
Configuring fault propagation
Configuration example for fault propagation using oper-group
Fault propagation to access dot1q/QinQ ports on the 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE in standalone mode
Configuring fault propagation
Configuration example for fault propagation using oper-group
Service Assurance Agent overview
SAA two-way timing
Traceroute implementation
NTP
Writing SAA results to accounting files
Accounting file management
Assigning SAA to an accounting file ID
Continuous testing
Configuring SAA test parameters
Y.1564 testhead OAM tool
Prerequisites for using the testhead tool
Generic prerequisites for use of testhead tool (applicable for all 7210 SAS platforms)
Configuration guidelines
Configuring testhead tool parameters
OAM Performance Monitoring (OAM-PM)
Session
Standard PM packets
Measurement intervals
Data structures and storage
Bin groups
Relating the components
Monitoring
Accounting policy configuration
ETH-CFM configuration
Service configuration
OAM-PM configuration
Show and monitor commands
Diagnostics command reference
Command hierarchies
OAM commands
Base operational commands
LSP diagnostics
LDP diagnostics
TWAMP
TWAMP Light
SDP diagnostics
Common service diagnostics
VLL diagnostics
VPLS MAC diagnostics
Ethernet in the First Mile (EFM) commands
ETH-CFM OAM commands
ETH-CFM configuration commands
Y.1564 testhead OAM commands
Y.1564 testhead OAM commands
Show commands
Clear commands
OAM Performance Monitoring, bin group, and session commands
OAM-PM session IP commands
Clear commands
SAA commands
Show commands
Monitor commands
Clear commands
Command descriptions
Operational commands
Service diagnostics
VPLS MAC diagnostics
EFM commands
ETH-CFM OAM commands
ETH CFM configuration commands
Testhead commands
OAM testhead commands
OAM Performance Monitoring, bin group, and session commands
Service Assurance Agent (SAA) commands
OAM SAA commands
LDP treetrace commands
TWAMP commands
TWAMP Light commands
Show commands
Monitor commands
Clear commands
Tools command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Tools dump commands
Tools perform commands
Command descriptions
Tools commands
Generic commands
Dump commands
Dump router commands
Dump service commands
Performance commands
Common CLI command descriptions
In this chapter
Common service commands
Command descriptions
SAP syntax
Port syntax
Standards and protocol support
Customer Documentation and Product Support
Legal notice
Getting started
About this guide
Document structure and content
7210 SAS modes of operation
7210 SAS port modes
Nokia 7210 SAS services configuration process
Conventions
Precautionary and information messages
Options or substeps in procedures and sequential workflows
Mirror services
Service mirroring
Mirror implementation
Mirror source and destinations
Local and remote mirroring
Mirroring performance
Mirroring configuration
Configuration process overview
Configuration notes
Configuring service mirroring with CLI
Mirror configuration overview
Defining mirrored traffic
Basic mirroring configuration
Mirror classification rules
Port
SAP
MAC filter
IP filter
Common configuration tasks
Configuring a local mirror service
Configuring a remote mirror service
Service management tasks
Modifying a local mirrored service
Deleting a local mirrored service
Modifying a remote mirrored service
Deleting a remote mirrored service
Mirror service command reference
Command hierarchies
Mirror configuration commands for 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE, and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE in network mode
Mirror configuration commands for 7210 SAS devices configured in access-uplink mode
Mirror configuration commands for 7210 SAS-T in network mode, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE, 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE, 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12
Show commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Mirror destination configuration commands
Mirror source configuration commands
Show commands
OAM and SAA
OAM overview
LSP diagnostics: LSP ping and trace
LSP ping/trace for an LSP using a BGP IPv4 label route
ECMP considerations
LSP ping and LSP trace over unnumbered IP interface
Downstream Detailed Mapping (DDMAP) TLV
Using DDMAP TLV in LSP stitching and LSP hierarchy
Responder node procedures
Sender node procedures
MPLS OAM support in segment routing
SR extensions for LSP-PING and LSP-TRACE
Operating guidelines on SR-ISIS or SR-OSPF tunnels
Operating guidelines on SR-ISIS tunnel stitched to LDP FEC
Operation on a BGP IPv4 LSP resolved over an SR-ISIS IPv4 tunnel or an SR-OSPF IPv4 tunnel
LSP ping for RSVP P2MP LSP
LSP trace for RSVP P2MP LSP
LSP trace behavior when S2L path traverses a re-merge node
SDP diagnostics
SDP ping
SDP MTU path discovery
Service diagnostics
VPLS MAC diagnostics
MAC ping
MAC trace
CPE ping
MAC populate
MAC purge
VLL diagnostics
VCCV ping
VCCV-ping application
VCCV-ping in a multi-segment pseudowire
Automated VCCV-trace capability for MS-pseudowire
VCCV for static pseudowire segments
Detailed VCCV-trace operation
Control plane processing of a VCCV echo message in a MS-pseudowire
Sending a VCCV echo request
Receiving an VCCV echo request
Receiving an VCCV echo reply
MPLS-TP on-demand OAM commands
MPLS-TP pseudowires: VCCV-ping/VCCV-trace
MPLS-TP LSPs: LSP ping/LSP trace
MPLS-TP show commands
Static MPLS labels
MPLS-TP tunnel configuration
MPLS-TP path configuration
MPLS-TP protection
BFD
MPLS TP node configuration
MPLS-TP interfaces
Services using MPLS-TP PWs
MPLS-TP debug commands
IP Performance Monitoring (IP PM)
Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol (TWAMP)
Configuration notes
Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol Light (TWAMP Light)
Ethernet Connectivity Fault Management
ETH-CFM building blocks
Loopback
Linktrace
Continuity Check (CC)
Alarm Indication Signal (ETH-AIS Y.1731)
Test (ETH-TST Y.1731)
Y.1731 time stamp capability
ITU-T Y.1731 Ethernet Bandwidth Notification
ETH-BN configuration guidelines
Port-based MEPs
ETH-CFM statistics
Synthetic Loss Measurement (ETH-SL)
Configuration example
ETH-CFM QoS considerations
ETH-CFM configuration guidelines
OAM mapping
CFM connectivity fault conditions
CFM fault propagation methods
Epipe services
CFM detected fault
SAP/SDP-binding failure (including pseudowire status)
Service down
Interaction with pseudowire redundancy
LLF and CFM fault propagation
802.3ah EFM OAM mapping and interaction with service manager
Fault propagation to access dot1q/QinQ ports on the 7210 SAS-T in access-uplink mode
Configuring fault propagation
Configuration example for fault propagation using oper-group
Fault propagation to access dot1q/QinQ ports on the 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE in standalone mode
Configuring fault propagation
Configuration example for fault propagation using oper-group
Service Assurance Agent overview
SAA two-way timing
Traceroute implementation
NTP
Writing SAA results to accounting files
Accounting file management
Assigning SAA to an accounting file ID
Continuous testing
Configuring SAA test parameters
Y.1564 testhead OAM tool
Prerequisites for using the testhead tool
Generic prerequisites for use of testhead tool (applicable for all 7210 SAS platforms)
Configuration guidelines
Configuring testhead tool parameters
OAM Performance Monitoring (OAM-PM)
Session
Standard PM packets
Measurement intervals
Data structures and storage
Bin groups
Relating the components
Monitoring
Accounting policy configuration
ETH-CFM configuration
Service configuration
OAM-PM configuration
Show and monitor commands
Diagnostics command reference
Command hierarchies
OAM commands
Base operational commands
LSP diagnostics
LDP diagnostics
TWAMP
TWAMP Light
SDP diagnostics
Common service diagnostics
VLL diagnostics
VPLS MAC diagnostics
Ethernet in the First Mile (EFM) commands
ETH-CFM OAM commands
ETH-CFM configuration commands
Y.1564 testhead OAM commands
Y.1564 testhead OAM commands
Show commands
Clear commands
OAM Performance Monitoring, bin group, and session commands
OAM-PM session IP commands
Clear commands
SAA commands
Show commands
Monitor commands
Clear commands
Command descriptions
Operational commands
Service diagnostics
VPLS MAC diagnostics
EFM commands
ETH-CFM OAM commands
ETH CFM configuration commands
Testhead commands
OAM testhead commands
OAM Performance Monitoring, bin group, and session commands
Service Assurance Agent (SAA) commands
OAM SAA commands
LDP treetrace commands
TWAMP commands
TWAMP Light commands
Show commands
Monitor commands
Clear commands
Tools command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Tools dump commands
Tools perform commands
Command descriptions
Tools commands
Generic commands
Dump commands
Dump router commands
Dump service commands
Performance commands
Common CLI command descriptions
In this chapter
Common service commands
Command descriptions
SAP syntax
Port syntax
Standards and protocol support
Customer Documentation and Product Support
7210 SAS-D, Dxp Quality of Service Guide Release 22.9.R1
Legal notice
Getting started
About this guide
Document structure and content
7210 SAS modes of operation
7210 SAS port modes
Nokia 7210 SAS-series services configuration process
Conventions
Precautionary and information messages
Options or substeps in procedures and sequential workflows
QoS policies
QoS policies overview
Overview of QoS policies on 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
Summary of major functions of QoS policies
Network and service QoS policies
Network QoS policies on access-uplink ports
Default network QoS policy (egress) for the 7210 SAS-Dxp
Default network QoS policy (ingress)
Network queue policies in access-uplink mode
Service ingress QoS policies
Default service ingress policy
Service ingress classification
Service ingress classification
Hierarchical ingress policing on 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
Access egress QoS policies
Default access egress policy
Meters/policers
Metering/policing and meter parameters
Meter ID
Committed information rate (meters)
Peak information rate (meters)
Adaptation rule for meters
Adaptation rule for meters on 7210 SAS-D devices
Adaptation rule for meters on 7210 SAS-Dxp devices
Committed burst size (meters/policers)
Maximum burst size (meters/policers)
Excess burst size (meters/policers)
Meter counters
Meter modes
Color-aware and color-blind policing/metering
QoS overrides for meters/policers
Configuration guidelines for QoS override
Configuring meter override parameters
Forwarding classes
FC-to-queue ID map
Schedulers
Port scheduler policies
Scheduler modes
CPU queues
Overview
Egress port rate limiting
Queue management
Queues and queue parameters
Queue ID
Committed information rate
Peak information rate
Adaptation rule for queues
Committed burst size (queue)
Maximum burst size (queue)
Default CBS and MBS for queues
Queue counters
Buffer pools
Buffer pools
Decommissioning ports with per-port MBS pool on 7210 SAS-Dxp
Using decommission command for buffer allocation on 7210 SAS-Dxp
Configuration guidelines for use of decommission commands on 7210 SAS-Dxp
Slope policies
RED slopes
Operation and configuration of RED slopes for 7210 SAS-D
Operation and configuration of RED slopes for 7210 SAS-Dxp
Simplified overview of RED for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
Tuning the shared buffer utilization calculation on 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
Slope policy parameters for 7210 SAS-D
Slope policy parameters for 7210 SAS-Dxp
QoS policy entities
Configuration notes
DEI-based classification and marking
DEI-based classification
DEI-based marking
Configuration guidelines
Port level egress rate-limiting
Overview
Applications
Effect of port-level rate-limiting on queue functionality
Basic configurations
Modifying port level egress-rate command
Removing port level egress-rate command
Default egress-rate values
Port level egress-rate command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Show commands
Configuration descriptions
Configuration commands
Show commands
SAP egress aggregate meter
Overview
Configuration notes
Basic configurations
SAP egress aggregate meter command reference
Frame-based accounting
Overview
Frame-based accounting
Effects of enabling ingress frame-based accounting on ingress meter functionality
Effects of enabling egress frame-based accounting on access-uplink queue functionality
Accounting and statistics
Basic configurations
Enabling and disabling frame-based accounting
Frame-based accounting command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Show commands
Configuration descriptions
Configuration commands
Show commands
Network QoS policies
Overview of network QoS policies
Resource allocation for network QoS policy
Network QoS policies resource usage examples
Example 1
Example 2
Example 3
Example 4
Example 5
Example 6
Example 7
Example 8
Basic configuration
Create a network QoS policy
Default network policy values
DSCP marking for CPU-generated traffic
Default DSCP mapping table
Service management tasks
Deleting QoS policies
Remove a policy from the QoS configuration
Copying and overwriting network policies
Editing QoS policies
Network QoS policy command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
Operational commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Operational commands
Network QoS policy commands
Network ingress QoS policy commands
Network egress QoS policy commands
Network egress QoS policy forwarding class commands
Show commands
Network queue QoS policies
Overview
Basic configurations
Creating a network queue QoS policy
Applying network queue configuration in access-uplink mode
Default network queue policy values
Service management tasks
Deleting network queue QoS policies
Copying and overwriting network queue QoS policies
Editing network queue QoS policies
Network queue QoS policy command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Operational commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Operational commands
Network queue QoS policy commands
Network queue QoS policy queue commands
Show commands
Service ingress QoS policies
Overview of service ingress policy
Default SAP ingress policy
SAP ingress policy defaults
Use of index file by SAP QoS ingress policy
Use of the keyword multipoint for default meter ‟11”
Example uses of the multipoint meter
Service ingress meter selection rules
Service ingress QoS policy configuration considerations
Resource allocation for service ingress QoS policy classification rules
Computation of SAP ingress classification and meter resources used per SAP ingress policy
Determining the number of classification entries
Rules for a SAP in a VPLS
Rules for a SAP in a VLL, IES, or VPRN service with PIM/IP multicast disabled
Rules for a SAP in an IES or VPRN service with PIM/IP multicast enabled
Calculating the number of classification entries per FC
Determining the number of classification entries per policy (TC)
Determining the number of policers/meters per policy (TP)
Service ingress QoS policies resource usage examples
Example 1
Example 1a (default multipoint meter 11 is not used)
Example 2
Example 2a (default multipoint meter 11 is not used)
Example 3
Example 3a (default multipoint meter 11 is not used)
Example 4
Example 4a (default multipoint meter 11 is not used)
Example 5
Basic configurations
Create service ingress QoS policies
Service ingress QoS policy
Service ingress QoS meter
SAP ingress FC
Service ingress IP match criteria
Service ingress MAC match criteria
Applying service ingress policies
Epipe service
VPLS
IES
Service management tasks
Deleting QoS policies
Removing a QoS policy from service SAPs
Copying and overwriting QoS policies
Remove a policy from the QoS configuration
Editing QoS policies
Service SAP QoS policy command reference
Service ingress QoS policy commands
Operational commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Operational commands
Service ingress QoS policy commands
Service ingress QoS policy forwarding class commands
Service ingress QoS policy entry commands
IP QoS policy match commands
Service ingress MAC QoS policy match commands
Service meter QoS policy commands
Show commands
Access egress QoS policies
Overview
Basic configurations
Modifying access egress QoS queues
Applying access egress QoS policies
Ethernet ports
Default access egress QoS policy values
Deleting QoS policies
Removing a policy from the QoS configuration
Access egress QoS policy command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Access egress queue QoS policy commands
Port scheduler policies
Configuring port scheduler policies
Basic configurations
Creating a QoS port scheduler policy
Service management tasks
Copying and overwriting port scheduler policies
Editing QoS policies
QoS port scheduler policy command reference
Command hierarchies
Port scheduler policy configuration commands
Operational commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Operational commands
Port scheduler policy commands
Show commands
Slope QoS policies
Overview of buffer pools
Configuration guidelines for 7210 SAS-D
Configuration guidelines for 7210 SAS-Dxp
Basic configurations
Create a slope QoS policy for 7210 SAS-D
Create a slope QoS policy for 7210 SAS-Dxp
Applying slope policies
Default slope policy values
Default slope values for 7210 SAS-D
Default slope values for 7210 SAS-Dxp
Deleting QoS policies
Remove a policy from the QoS configuration
Copying and overwriting QoS policies
Editing QoS policies
Slope QoS policy command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands for 7210 SAS-D
Configuration commands for 7210 SAS-Dxp
WRED commands (supported only on 7210 SAS-D)
Operational commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Operational commands
Slope policy QoS commands
Slope policy QoS policy commands
RED slope commands
WRED command for 7210 SAS-D
Show commands
Show commands
Standards and protocol support
Customer Documentation and Product Support
Legal notice
Getting started
About this guide
Document structure and content
7210 SAS modes of operation
7210 SAS port modes
Nokia 7210 SAS-series services configuration process
Conventions
Precautionary and information messages
Options or substeps in procedures and sequential workflows
QoS policies
QoS policies overview
Overview of QoS policies on 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
Summary of major functions of QoS policies
Network and service QoS policies
Network QoS policies on access-uplink ports
Default network QoS policy (egress) for the 7210 SAS-Dxp
Default network QoS policy (ingress)
Network queue policies in access-uplink mode
Service ingress QoS policies
Default service ingress policy
Service ingress classification
Service ingress classification
Hierarchical ingress policing on 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
Access egress QoS policies
Default access egress policy
Meters/policers
Metering/policing and meter parameters
Meter ID
Committed information rate (meters)
Peak information rate (meters)
Adaptation rule for meters
Adaptation rule for meters on 7210 SAS-D devices
Adaptation rule for meters on 7210 SAS-Dxp devices
Committed burst size (meters/policers)
Maximum burst size (meters/policers)
Excess burst size (meters/policers)
Meter counters
Meter modes
Color-aware and color-blind policing/metering
QoS overrides for meters/policers
Configuration guidelines for QoS override
Configuring meter override parameters
Forwarding classes
FC-to-queue ID map
Schedulers
Port scheduler policies
Scheduler modes
CPU queues
Overview
Egress port rate limiting
Queue management
Queues and queue parameters
Queue ID
Committed information rate
Peak information rate
Adaptation rule for queues
Committed burst size (queue)
Maximum burst size (queue)
Default CBS and MBS for queues
Queue counters
Buffer pools
Buffer pools
Decommissioning ports with per-port MBS pool on 7210 SAS-Dxp
Using decommission command for buffer allocation on 7210 SAS-Dxp
Configuration guidelines for use of decommission commands on 7210 SAS-Dxp
Slope policies
RED slopes
Operation and configuration of RED slopes for 7210 SAS-D
Operation and configuration of RED slopes for 7210 SAS-Dxp
Simplified overview of RED for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
Tuning the shared buffer utilization calculation on 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
Slope policy parameters for 7210 SAS-D
Slope policy parameters for 7210 SAS-Dxp
QoS policy entities
Configuration notes
DEI-based classification and marking
DEI-based classification
DEI-based marking
Configuration guidelines
Port level egress rate-limiting
Overview
Applications
Effect of port-level rate-limiting on queue functionality
Basic configurations
Modifying port level egress-rate command
Removing port level egress-rate command
Default egress-rate values
Port level egress-rate command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Show commands
Configuration descriptions
Configuration commands
Show commands
SAP egress aggregate meter
Overview
Configuration notes
Basic configurations
SAP egress aggregate meter command reference
Frame-based accounting
Overview
Frame-based accounting
Effects of enabling ingress frame-based accounting on ingress meter functionality
Effects of enabling egress frame-based accounting on access-uplink queue functionality
Accounting and statistics
Basic configurations
Enabling and disabling frame-based accounting
Frame-based accounting command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Show commands
Configuration descriptions
Configuration commands
Show commands
Network QoS policies
Overview of network QoS policies
Resource allocation for network QoS policy
Network QoS policies resource usage examples
Example 1
Example 2
Example 3
Example 4
Example 5
Example 6
Example 7
Example 8
Basic configuration
Create a network QoS policy
Default network policy values
DSCP marking for CPU-generated traffic
Default DSCP mapping table
Service management tasks
Deleting QoS policies
Remove a policy from the QoS configuration
Copying and overwriting network policies
Editing QoS policies
Network QoS policy command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
Operational commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Operational commands
Network QoS policy commands
Network ingress QoS policy commands
Network egress QoS policy commands
Network egress QoS policy forwarding class commands
Show commands
Network queue QoS policies
Overview
Basic configurations
Creating a network queue QoS policy
Applying network queue configuration in access-uplink mode
Default network queue policy values
Service management tasks
Deleting network queue QoS policies
Copying and overwriting network queue QoS policies
Editing network queue QoS policies
Network queue QoS policy command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Operational commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Operational commands
Network queue QoS policy commands
Network queue QoS policy queue commands
Show commands
Service ingress QoS policies
Overview of service ingress policy
Default SAP ingress policy
SAP ingress policy defaults
Use of index file by SAP QoS ingress policy
Use of the keyword multipoint for default meter ‟11”
Example uses of the multipoint meter
Service ingress meter selection rules
Service ingress QoS policy configuration considerations
Resource allocation for service ingress QoS policy classification rules
Computation of SAP ingress classification and meter resources used per SAP ingress policy
Determining the number of classification entries
Rules for a SAP in a VPLS
Rules for a SAP in a VLL, IES, or VPRN service with PIM/IP multicast disabled
Rules for a SAP in an IES or VPRN service with PIM/IP multicast enabled
Calculating the number of classification entries per FC
Determining the number of classification entries per policy (TC)
Determining the number of policers/meters per policy (TP)
Service ingress QoS policies resource usage examples
Example 1
Example 1a (default multipoint meter 11 is not used)
Example 2
Example 2a (default multipoint meter 11 is not used)
Example 3
Example 3a (default multipoint meter 11 is not used)
Example 4
Example 4a (default multipoint meter 11 is not used)
Example 5
Basic configurations
Create service ingress QoS policies
Service ingress QoS policy
Service ingress QoS meter
SAP ingress FC
Service ingress IP match criteria
Service ingress MAC match criteria
Applying service ingress policies
Epipe service
VPLS
IES
Service management tasks
Deleting QoS policies
Removing a QoS policy from service SAPs
Copying and overwriting QoS policies
Remove a policy from the QoS configuration
Editing QoS policies
Service SAP QoS policy command reference
Service ingress QoS policy commands
Operational commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Operational commands
Service ingress QoS policy commands
Service ingress QoS policy forwarding class commands
Service ingress QoS policy entry commands
IP QoS policy match commands
Service ingress MAC QoS policy match commands
Service meter QoS policy commands
Show commands
Access egress QoS policies
Overview
Basic configurations
Modifying access egress QoS queues
Applying access egress QoS policies
Ethernet ports
Default access egress QoS policy values
Deleting QoS policies
Removing a policy from the QoS configuration
Access egress QoS policy command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Access egress queue QoS policy commands
Port scheduler policies
Configuring port scheduler policies
Basic configurations
Creating a QoS port scheduler policy
Service management tasks
Copying and overwriting port scheduler policies
Editing QoS policies
QoS port scheduler policy command reference
Command hierarchies
Port scheduler policy configuration commands
Operational commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Operational commands
Port scheduler policy commands
Show commands
Slope QoS policies
Overview of buffer pools
Configuration guidelines for 7210 SAS-D
Configuration guidelines for 7210 SAS-Dxp
Basic configurations
Create a slope QoS policy for 7210 SAS-D
Create a slope QoS policy for 7210 SAS-Dxp
Applying slope policies
Default slope policy values
Default slope values for 7210 SAS-D
Default slope values for 7210 SAS-Dxp
Deleting QoS policies
Remove a policy from the QoS configuration
Copying and overwriting QoS policies
Editing QoS policies
Slope QoS policy command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands for 7210 SAS-D
Configuration commands for 7210 SAS-Dxp
WRED commands (supported only on 7210 SAS-D)
Operational commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Operational commands
Slope policy QoS commands
Slope policy QoS policy commands
RED slope commands
WRED command for 7210 SAS-D
Show commands
Show commands
Standards and protocol support
Customer Documentation and Product Support
7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, K 2F6C4T, K 3SFP+ 8C Quality of Service Guide Release 22.9.R1
Legal notice
Getting started
About this guide
Document structure and content
7210 SAS modes of operation
7210 SAS port modes
7210 SAS QoS configuration process
Conventions
Precautionary and information messages
Options or substeps in procedures and sequential workflows
QoS policies
QoS policies overview
Overview of QoS policies on 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
Overview of QoS policies on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Overview of network QoS policy applied to access-uplink ports on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Overview of network QoS policy applied to network and hybrid ports on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Summary of major functions of QoS policies
Network and service QoS policies
Network QoS policies on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C network ports and hybrid ports
Ingress classification support for network ports and hybrid ports on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Egress marking support for network ports and hybrid ports on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Network QoS policies on access-uplink ports
Ingress classification support for access-uplink ports
Network queue policies
Service ingress QoS policies
Default service ingress policy
Service ingress classification
Service ingress classification
Service ingress classification — IP and MAC packet fields
Service egress QoS policies
Default service egress policy
Meters/policers
Meter/policers and policer parameters
Meter ID
Committed information rate
Peak information rate
Adaptation rule for meters
Committed burst size
Maximum burst size
Meter counters
Meter modes
Meter platform support
Ingress profile assignment
QoS override
Configuring meter override parameters
FCs
Forwarding-class to queue ID mapping
FC to queue ID mapping
Schedulers
CPU queues
Egress port rate limiting
Queue management
Queues and queue parameters
Queue ID
Committed information rate
Peak information rate
Adaptation rule for queues
Committed burst size
Maximum burst size
Ingress profile assignment
Weight and priority
Queue counters
Queue platform support
Buffer pools
Ring and non-ring buffer pool
Configuration guidelines for CBS and MBS
Slope policies
RED slopes
Operation and configuration of RED slopes
Simplified overview of RED
Slope policy parameters
Preclassification on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
QoS policy entities
Summary of QoS policy support for hybrid ports on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Configuration notes
DEI-based classification and marking
DEI-based classification and marking
DEI-based marking
Port-level egress rate limiting
Overview
Basic configurations
Modifying the port-level egress-rate command
Removing the port-level egress-rate command
Port level egress-rate command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Show commands
Frame-based accounting
Overview of frame-based accounting
Enabling and disabling frame-based accounting
Frame-based accounting command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Show commands
DSCP, dot1p, and MPLS EXP classification policies
Overview
DSCP classification policy
dot1p classification policy
MPLS EXP classification policy
Configuring classification policies
DSCP, dot1p, and MPLS EXP classification policy command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
Configuration commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Show commands
Operational commands
Command description
Configuration commands
Show commands
Network QoS policies
Overview of network QoS policy on 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
Resource allocation for network QoS policy for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
Basic configurations for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
Create a network QoS policy for access-uplink ports on 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
Default network policy values for access-uplink ports on 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
Overview of network QoS policy on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Network QoS policy for access-uplink ports on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Network QoS policy for network ports and hybrid ports on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Resource allocation for network QoS policy for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Basic configurations for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Create a network QoS policy on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Create a network QoS policy for access-uplink ports on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Default network policy values for access-uplink ports on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Create a network QoS policy for network ports and hybrid ports on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Default network policy values on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
DSCP marking CPU self-generated traffic
QoS for CPU self-generated traffic on network interfaces for the 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Default DSCP mapping
Service management tasks
Deleting QoS policies
Remove a policy from the QoS configuration
Copying and overwriting network policies
Editing QoS policies
Network QoS policy command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
Configuration commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Self-generated traffic commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Operational commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Operational commands
Network QoS Policy commands
Network egress QoS policy commands
Network ingress QoS policy commands
Network ingress queue QoS policy commands
Self-generated traffic commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Show commands
Network queue QoS policies
Overview
Basic configurations
Creating a network queue QoS policy
Applying network queue policies
Applying network queue configuration to access-uplink ports
Applying network queue configuration to network ports on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Default network queue policy values
Default network queue policy for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
Default network queue policy for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T
Default network queue policy for 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Service management tasks
Deleting network queue QoS policies
Copying and overwriting network queue QoS policies
Editing network queue QoS policies
Network queue QoS policy command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Operational commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Operational commands
Network queue QoS policy commands
Network queue QoS policy queue commands
Show commands
Service ingress QoS policies
Overview of service ingress policy
Configuration guidelines for SAP-ingress policy
Resource allocation for service ingress QoS classification policy
Resource allocation for SAP ingress meters
Default SAP-ingress policy
Use of index file by SAP QoS ingress policy
Basic configurations
Service ingress QoS policies
Service ingress QoS queues
Service ingress QoS meters
SAP ingress FC configuration
Service ingress dot1p and IP DSCP criteria
Service ingress IP match criteria
Service ingress MAC match criteria
Applying service ingress policies
Epipe service
VPLS
IES
Service management tasks
Deleting QoS policies
Removing a QoS policy from service SAPs
Copying and overwriting QoS policies
Removing a policy from the QoS configuration
Editing QoS policies
Service SAP QoS policy command reference
Command hierarchies
Service ingress QoS policy commands
Operational commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Operational commands
Service ingress QoS policy commands
Service ingress QoS policy entry commands
Service ingress MAC QoS policy match commands
SAP ingress queue and meter QoS policy commands
Show commands
Service egress QoS policies
Overview
Egress SAP FC and profile overrides
Configuration guidelines for access SAP egress policies
Basic configurations
Creating an access SAP egress policy
Editing QoS policies
Service egress policy command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Copy commands
Show commands
Command description
Configuration commands
Generic commands
SAP egress queue QoS policy commands
Operational commands
Show commands
Schedulers
Overview
Slope QoS policies
Overview of buffer pools and slope policies
Basic configurations
Creating a slope QoS policy
Default slope policy values for the 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Applying slope policies
Deleting QoS policies
Removing a policy from the QoS configuration
Copying and overwriting QoS policies
Editing QoS policies
Slope QoS policy command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Operational commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Slope policy QoS commands
Slope policy QoS policy commands
RED slope commands
Operational commands
Show commands
Remark policies
Overview of remark policies for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
Configuration guidelines for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
Overview of remark policies for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Configuration guidelines for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Basic configurations
Creating a remark policy
Editing QoS policies
Remark policy command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
Configuration commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Operational commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Remark policy QoS commands
Remark policy forwarding class commands
Operational commands
Show commands
Standards and protocol support
Customer Documentation and Product Support
Legal notice
Getting started
About this guide
Document structure and content
7210 SAS modes of operation
7210 SAS port modes
7210 SAS QoS configuration process
Conventions
Precautionary and information messages
Options or substeps in procedures and sequential workflows
QoS policies
QoS policies overview
Overview of QoS policies on 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
Overview of QoS policies on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Overview of network QoS policy applied to access-uplink ports on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Overview of network QoS policy applied to network and hybrid ports on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Summary of major functions of QoS policies
Network and service QoS policies
Network QoS policies on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C network ports and hybrid ports
Ingress classification support for network ports and hybrid ports on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Egress marking support for network ports and hybrid ports on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Network QoS policies on access-uplink ports
Ingress classification support for access-uplink ports
Network queue policies
Service ingress QoS policies
Default service ingress policy
Service ingress classification
Service ingress classification
Service ingress classification — IP and MAC packet fields
Service egress QoS policies
Default service egress policy
Meters/policers
Meter/policers and policer parameters
Meter ID
Committed information rate
Peak information rate
Adaptation rule for meters
Committed burst size
Maximum burst size
Meter counters
Meter modes
Meter platform support
Ingress profile assignment
QoS override
Configuring meter override parameters
FCs
Forwarding-class to queue ID mapping
FC to queue ID mapping
Schedulers
CPU queues
Egress port rate limiting
Queue management
Queues and queue parameters
Queue ID
Committed information rate
Peak information rate
Adaptation rule for queues
Committed burst size
Maximum burst size
Ingress profile assignment
Weight and priority
Queue counters
Queue platform support
Buffer pools
Ring and non-ring buffer pool
Configuration guidelines for CBS and MBS
Slope policies
RED slopes
Operation and configuration of RED slopes
Simplified overview of RED
Slope policy parameters
Preclassification on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
QoS policy entities
Summary of QoS policy support for hybrid ports on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Configuration notes
DEI-based classification and marking
DEI-based classification and marking
DEI-based marking
Port-level egress rate limiting
Overview
Basic configurations
Modifying the port-level egress-rate command
Removing the port-level egress-rate command
Port level egress-rate command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Show commands
Frame-based accounting
Overview of frame-based accounting
Enabling and disabling frame-based accounting
Frame-based accounting command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Show commands
DSCP, dot1p, and MPLS EXP classification policies
Overview
DSCP classification policy
dot1p classification policy
MPLS EXP classification policy
Configuring classification policies
DSCP, dot1p, and MPLS EXP classification policy command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
Configuration commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Show commands
Operational commands
Command description
Configuration commands
Show commands
Network QoS policies
Overview of network QoS policy on 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
Resource allocation for network QoS policy for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
Basic configurations for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
Create a network QoS policy for access-uplink ports on 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
Default network policy values for access-uplink ports on 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
Overview of network QoS policy on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Network QoS policy for access-uplink ports on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Network QoS policy for network ports and hybrid ports on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Resource allocation for network QoS policy for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Basic configurations for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Create a network QoS policy on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Create a network QoS policy for access-uplink ports on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Default network policy values for access-uplink ports on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Create a network QoS policy for network ports and hybrid ports on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Default network policy values on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
DSCP marking CPU self-generated traffic
QoS for CPU self-generated traffic on network interfaces for the 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Default DSCP mapping
Service management tasks
Deleting QoS policies
Remove a policy from the QoS configuration
Copying and overwriting network policies
Editing QoS policies
Network QoS policy command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
Configuration commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Self-generated traffic commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Operational commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Operational commands
Network QoS Policy commands
Network egress QoS policy commands
Network ingress QoS policy commands
Network ingress queue QoS policy commands
Self-generated traffic commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Show commands
Network queue QoS policies
Overview
Basic configurations
Creating a network queue QoS policy
Applying network queue policies
Applying network queue configuration to access-uplink ports
Applying network queue configuration to network ports on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Default network queue policy values
Default network queue policy for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
Default network queue policy for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T
Default network queue policy for 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Service management tasks
Deleting network queue QoS policies
Copying and overwriting network queue QoS policies
Editing network queue QoS policies
Network queue QoS policy command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Operational commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Operational commands
Network queue QoS policy commands
Network queue QoS policy queue commands
Show commands
Service ingress QoS policies
Overview of service ingress policy
Configuration guidelines for SAP-ingress policy
Resource allocation for service ingress QoS classification policy
Resource allocation for SAP ingress meters
Default SAP-ingress policy
Use of index file by SAP QoS ingress policy
Basic configurations
Service ingress QoS policies
Service ingress QoS queues
Service ingress QoS meters
SAP ingress FC configuration
Service ingress dot1p and IP DSCP criteria
Service ingress IP match criteria
Service ingress MAC match criteria
Applying service ingress policies
Epipe service
VPLS
IES
Service management tasks
Deleting QoS policies
Removing a QoS policy from service SAPs
Copying and overwriting QoS policies
Removing a policy from the QoS configuration
Editing QoS policies
Service SAP QoS policy command reference
Command hierarchies
Service ingress QoS policy commands
Operational commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Operational commands
Service ingress QoS policy commands
Service ingress QoS policy entry commands
Service ingress MAC QoS policy match commands
SAP ingress queue and meter QoS policy commands
Show commands
Service egress QoS policies
Overview
Egress SAP FC and profile overrides
Configuration guidelines for access SAP egress policies
Basic configurations
Creating an access SAP egress policy
Editing QoS policies
Service egress policy command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Copy commands
Show commands
Command description
Configuration commands
Generic commands
SAP egress queue QoS policy commands
Operational commands
Show commands
Schedulers
Overview
Slope QoS policies
Overview of buffer pools and slope policies
Basic configurations
Creating a slope QoS policy
Default slope policy values for the 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Applying slope policies
Deleting QoS policies
Removing a policy from the QoS configuration
Copying and overwriting QoS policies
Editing QoS policies
Slope QoS policy command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Operational commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Slope policy QoS commands
Slope policy QoS policy commands
RED slope commands
Operational commands
Show commands
Remark policies
Overview of remark policies for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
Configuration guidelines for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
Overview of remark policies for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Configuration guidelines for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Basic configurations
Creating a remark policy
Editing QoS policies
Remark policy command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
Configuration commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Operational commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Remark policy QoS commands
Remark policy forwarding class commands
Operational commands
Show commands
Standards and protocol support
Customer Documentation and Product Support
7210 SAS-Mxp, R6, R12, S, Sx, T Quality of Service Guide Release 22.9.R1
Legal notice
Getting started
About this guide
Document structure and content
7210 SAS modes of operation
7210 SAS port modes
Nokia 7210 SAS-series services configuration process
Conventions
Precautionary and information messages
Options or substeps in procedures and sequential workflows
QoS policies
QoS policies overview
Overview of QoS policies on 7210 SAS-T in access-uplink mode
Overview of QoS policies on 7210 SAS-T in network mode
Overview of QoS policies on 7210 SAS-Mxp in network mode
Overview of QoS policies on 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
Overview of QoS policies on 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE
Network and service QoS policies
Network QoS policies in network mode
Network QoS policy ‟ip-interface” type
Network QoS policy ‟port” type
Network QoS policies in access-uplink mode
Network queue QoS policies
Network queue policies in network mode
Network queue policies in access-uplink mode
Service ingress QoS policies
CAM-based classification
Table-based classification
Hierarchical ingress policing
Service egress QoS policies on 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12
Access ingress QoS policies
Access egress QoS policies
Access egress QoS policies on 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE, and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE
Access egress QoS policies on 7210 SAS-Mxp
Access egress QoS policy for SAP-based queuing mode on 7210 SAS-Mxp
Access egress QoS policy for port-based queuing mode on 7210 SAS-Mxp
Access egress QoS policies on 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
Access egress QoS policies for SAP-based queuing mode
Access egress QoS policy for port-based queuing mode
Queue overrides for access egress QoS policies on the 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12
Configuring access egress QoS policy queue override parameters
Remark policies on 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, 7210 SAS-S 1/10GE, 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE, and 7210 SAS-T (network mode)
Egress port rate limiting
Forwarding classes
Forwarding class-to-queue ID map on 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, and 7210 SAS-T
Forwarding class-to-queue ID map on 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE
QoS policy entities
QoS policies for hybrid ports on 7210 SAS-T
QoS policies for hybrid ports on 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE
QoS policies for hybrid ports on 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12
Meters/policers
Meter/policer parameters
Meter ID
Committed information rate for meters
Peak information rate for meters
Color-aware and color-blind policers
Adaptation rule for meters
Committed burst size (for meter/policers)
Maximum burst size (for meter/policers)
Meter counters
Meter modes
QoS overrides for meters/policers
Configuration guidelines for QoS override
Configuring meter override parameters
Queue management
Queue parameters
Queue ID
CIR for queues
PIR for queues
Adaptation rule for queues
CBS and MBS for queues
Buffer pools
Buffer pools on 7210 SAS-T
Buffer pool allocation - per port MBS pool (7210 SAS-T)
Buffer pool allocation - per node MBS pool (7210 SAS-T)
Decommissioning ports with per port MBS pool
Using decommission command for buffer allocation on 7210 SAS-T devices
Configuration guidelines for use of decommission commands on 7210 SAS-T devices
Buffer pools on 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE
Buffer pools on 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12
Queue management policies for 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12
Queue management policy parameters
RED slopes in network and access-uplink mode
Tuning the shared buffer utilization calculation
Slope policies for 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE, and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE devices
Slope policy parameters
CPU queues
Schedulers
Scheduler modes on 7210 SAS-T
Port scheduler policies for 7210 SAS-T
Schedulers on 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE
Schedulers on 7210 SAS-Mxp
Schedulers on 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
Configuration notes
Discard eligibility indicator-based (DEI-based) classification and marking
DEI-based classification
DEI-based marking
Configuration guidelines
Port level egress rate-limiting
Overview
Applications
Effect of port level rate-limiting on network queue functionality
Basic configurations
Modifying port level egress-rate command
Removing port level egress-rate command
Default egress-rate values
Port level egress-rate command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Show commands
SAP egress aggregate meter
Overview
Configuration notes
Basic configurations
SAP egress aggregate meter command reference
Frame-based accounting
Overview
Frame-based accounting
Effects of enabling ingress frame-based accounting on ingress meter functionality
Effects of enabling egress frame-based accounting on network queue functionality
Accounting and statistics
Basic configurations
Enabling and disabling frame-based accounting
Default frame-based accounting values
Frame-based accounting command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Configuration commands
Network QoS policies
Overview
Overview of network QoS policies in network mode
Overview of network QoS policies in access-uplink mode
Network QoS policy in network mode
Network QoS policy (ip-interface type) behaviour for MPLS LSPs
Basic configurations
Create a network QoS policy (ip-interface type) for network mode
Example for network QoS policy of ip-interface type
Configuring network QoS policy (port type) for network mode
Default network policy values available in network mode
Resource allocation for network QoS policy
Network QoS policies resource usage examples
Example 1
Example 2
Example 3
Example 4
Example 5
Example 6
Example 7
Example 8
Network QoS policy in access-uplink mode
Basic configurations
Configuring network policy for access-uplink mode
Default network policy values available in access-uplink mode
DSCP and dot1p marking for CPU self-generated traffic
QoS for self-generated (CPU) traffic on network interfaces for the 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12
Default DSCP mapping table
Service management tasks
Deleting QoS policies
Remove a policy from the QoS configuration
Copying and overwriting network policies
Editing QoS policies
Network QoS policy command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands for MPLS EXP profile map (7210 SAS platforms operating in network mode)
Configuration commands (7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE, and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE configured in network mode)
Configuration commands (7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12)
Configuration commands (access-uplink mode)
Self-generated traffic commands (7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12)
Operational commands (network mode or access-uplink mode)
Show commands (network mode or access-uplink mode)
Show commands (7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12)
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Network QoS policy commands
Network QoS policy commands (7210 SAS-T in access-uplink mode)
Network ingress QoS policy commands
Network egress QoS policy commands
Self-generated traffic commands (7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12)
Operational commands
Show commands
Show commands (7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12)
Network queue QoS policies
Overview
Basic configurations
Create a network queue QoS policy
Applying network queue policies
Applying network queue configuration in network mode
Applying network queue configuration in access-uplink mode
Default network queue policy values
Default network queue policy values for hybrid ports on 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
Service management tasks
Deleting network queue QoS policies
Copying and overwriting network queue QoS policies
Editing network queue QoS policies
Network queue QoS policy command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands for 7210 SAS-T (in network mode and access-uplink mode)
Configuration commands for 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12
Configuration commands for 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE
Operational commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Network queue QoS policy commands
Network queue QoS policy queue commands
Operational commands
Show commands
Service ingress QoS policies
Overview
Default SAP ingress policy
SAP-ingress policy defaults
Resource allocation for SAP ingress policy
Use of index file by SAP QoS ingress policy
Use of the keyword ‟multipoint” for default meter ‟11”
Example uses of the multipoint meter
Service ingress meter selection rules
Default policy
VPLS service without meter ‟11”
VPLS service with meter ‟11”
Epipe, IES, and VPRN services without PIM
IES and VPRN services with PIM/multicast and without meter ‟11”
IES and VPRN services with PIM/multicast and meter ‟11”
Service ingress policy configuration considerations
Resource allocation for service ingress QoS policies using CAM-based classification
Resource configuration guidelines for service ingress QoS policies using CAM-based classification
Computation of resources used per SAP ingress policy for CAM-based classification
Determining the number of classification entries
Rules for a SAP in a VPLS
Rules for a SAP in a VLL, VPRN, or IES service with PIM disabled
Rules for a SAP in an IES or VPRN service with PIM/multicast enabled
Calculating the number of classification entries per FC
Determining the number of classification entries per policy (TC)
Determining the number of policers/meters per policy (TP)
Table-based classification using dot1p and IP DSCP for assigning FC and profile on SAP ingress for the 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12
IP DSCP and dot1p classification policy support
Default-FC assignment rules for SAPs in Layer 3 services
Precedence rules for DEI assignments on the 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12
Creating an IP DSCP and dot1p classification policy
CAM resource usage for IP DSCP and dot1p classification policies on the 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12
CAM resource allocation for table-based classification
Associating a DSCP or dot1p classification policy
Associating a classification policy with a SAP ingress QoS policy
Associating a classification policy with an Ethernet port
Assigning and enabling DSCP and dot1p classification policies to a SAP
Assigning and enabling policies to Epipe and VPLS SAPs
Assigning and enabling policies to IES and VPRN interface SAPs
Assigning policies to RVPLS SAPs
Create a SAP ingress policy and assign the policy to an RVPLS SAP
Table-based classification per IP Interface for routed packets
Table-based classification per port for bridged packets
Service meter for SAP ingress (7210 SAS-Mxp)
Default service meter policy
Resource usage for service meters
Examples for service meters with computation of resource usage
Calculating resources required for classification
Examples: calculating resources required for CAM-based classification
Example 1
Example 1a (default multipoint meter 11 is not used):
Example 2
Example 2a (default multipoint meter "11" is not used)
Example 3
Example 3a (default multipoint meter "11" is not used):
Example 4
Example 4a (default multipoint meter "11" is not used):
Example 5
Example 6
Example 7
Example 8
Example 9
Example 9a (default multipoint meter "11" is not used):
Example 10
Example 11
Examples: calculating resources required for IP DSCP table-based classification with CAM-based policing (7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12)
Example 1: Epipe, IES, and VPRN services using unicast traffic type
Example 2: VPLS using unicast and BUM meter with IES or VPRN using multicast
Example 3: VPLS service using unicast, broadcast, multicast, and unknown-unicast with additional FCs
Example 4: routed VPLS on access port using unicast, broadcast, multicast, and unknown-unicast with additional FCs
Example 5: routed VPLS service on a hybrid port using unicast, broadcast, multicast and unknown-unicast for some FCs
Example 6: routed VPLS on access port and hybrid port
Basic configurations
Create service ingress QoS policies
Service ingress QoS meter
Service ingress IP match criteria
Service ingress MAC match criteria
Applying service ingress policies
Epipe
VPLS
VPRN
IES
Service management tasks
Deleting QoS policies
Remove a QoS policy from service SAPs
Copying and overwriting QoS policies
Remove a policy from the QoS configuration
Editing QoS policies
Service ingress QoS policy command reference
Command hierarchy
Service ingress QoS policy commands
Table-based IP DSCP and dot1p classification policy commands for SAP ingress (7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12)
Service meter commands for SAP ingress (7210 SAS-Mxp only)
Operational commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Service ingress QoS policy commands
Service ingress QoS policy entry commands
Service ingress QoS policy forwarding class commands
IP QoS policy match commands
Service ingress MAC QoS policy match commands
Service meter QoS policy commands
IP DSCP and dot1p classification policy commands (for 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12)
Service meter commands for SAP ingress (for 7210 SAS-Mxp)
Operational commands
Show commands
Access egress QoS policies on 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE, and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE
Overview
Basic configurations
Modifying access egress QoS queues
Applying access egress QoS policies
Ethernet ports
Default access egress QoS policy values
Deleting QoS policies
Removing a policy from the QoS configuration
Access egress QoS policy command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands for 7210 SAS-T (access-uplink mode)
Configuration commands for 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE, and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE (network mode)
Operational commands
Show commands
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Access egress queue QoS policy commands
Operational commands
Show commands
Access egress QoS policies for 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12
Overview
Access egress QoS policy for SAP-based queuing mode
Access egress QoS policy for port-based queuing mode
Access egress QoS policy queue override
Basic configurations
Modifying access egress QoS queues on the 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
Applying access egress QoS policies on the 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12
Ethernet ports
Editing QoS policies
Deleting QoS policies
Removing a policy from the QoS configuration
Access egress QoS policy command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands for 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12
Show commands
Command descriptions
Generic commands
Access egress queue QoS policy commands
Show commands
Service egress policies on 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12
Overview
Basic configurations
Create a SAP egress policy
Editing QoS policies
Service egress policy command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands for 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12
Operational commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
SAP egress queue QoS policy commands
Operational commands
Show Commands
QoS port scheduler policies for 7210 SAS-T
Overview
Configuring port scheduler policies
Basic configurations
Creating a QoS port scheduler policy
Service management tasks
Copying and overwriting scheduler policies
Editing QoS policies
Schedulers on 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE
Configuring scheduler policies
QoS port scheduler policy command reference
Command hierarchies
Port scheduler policy configuration commands
Operational commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Port scheduler policy commands
Operational commands
Show commands
Schedulers on 7210 SAS-Mxp
Overview
Scheduling with SAP-based queues on access ports
Scheduling on network ports
Scheduling on hybrid port with SAP-based egress queues
Port-based scheduling and queuing on access ports
Scheduling on hybrid port with port-based SAP queues
Schedulers on 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
Scheduling with SAP-based queues on access ports
Scheduling on network ports
Scheduling on hybrid port with SAP-based egress queues
Port-based scheduling and queuing on access ports
Scheduling on hybrid port with port-based SAP queues
Slope QoS policies
Overview
Configuration guidelines
WRED support on 7210 SAS-T access-uplink and network mode, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE, and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE
Basic configurations
Create a slope QoS policy
Applying slope policies
Ports
Default slope policy values
Service management tasks
Deleting QoS policies
Ports
Remove a policy from the QoS configuration
Copying and overwriting QoS policies
Editing QoS policies
Slope QoS policy command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Operational commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Slope policy QoS commands
Slope policy QoS policy commands
RED slope commands
Slope policy QoS policy commands
Operational commands
Show commands
Queue management policies
Overview
Basic configurations
Service management tasks
Creating a queue management policy
Editing QoS policies
Queue management policy command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands for 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12
Operational commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Queue management policy QoS commands
WRED slope commands
Operational commands
Show commands
Remark policies
Overview
Configuration guidelines
Basic configurations
Creating a remark policy
Editing QoS policies
Remark policy command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands for 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE, 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE, and 7210 SAS-T in network mode
Operational commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Remark policy QoS commands
Remark policy forwarding class commands
Operational commands
Show commands
Access ingress QoS policies
Overview
Resource allocation for access ingress QoS policies
Use of index file for access ingress QoS policies
Calculating the number of QoS resources
Calculating the number of meters or policers
Determining the number of resources allocated to the policy
Example of access ingress QoS policy resource calculations
Example 1
Example 2
Example 3
Configuration guidelines for using a port-based access ingress QoS policy
Basic configurations
Editing an access ingress QoS policy configuration
Removing a policy from the QoS configuration
Deleting access ingress QoS policies
Access-ingress QoS policy command reference
Command hierarchies
Access-ingress QoS configuration commands
Command descriptions
Generic commands
Access ingress QoS policy commands
Standards and protocol support
Customer Documentation and Product Support
Legal notice
Getting started
About this guide
Document structure and content
7210 SAS modes of operation
7210 SAS port modes
Nokia 7210 SAS-series services configuration process
Conventions
Precautionary and information messages
Options or substeps in procedures and sequential workflows
QoS policies
QoS policies overview
Overview of QoS policies on 7210 SAS-T in access-uplink mode
Overview of QoS policies on 7210 SAS-T in network mode
Overview of QoS policies on 7210 SAS-Mxp in network mode
Overview of QoS policies on 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
Overview of QoS policies on 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE
Network and service QoS policies
Network QoS policies in network mode
Network QoS policy ‟ip-interface” type
Network QoS policy ‟port” type
Network QoS policies in access-uplink mode
Network queue QoS policies
Network queue policies in network mode
Network queue policies in access-uplink mode
Service ingress QoS policies
CAM-based classification
Table-based classification
Hierarchical ingress policing
Service egress QoS policies on 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12
Access ingress QoS policies
Access egress QoS policies
Access egress QoS policies on 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE, and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE
Access egress QoS policies on 7210 SAS-Mxp
Access egress QoS policy for SAP-based queuing mode on 7210 SAS-Mxp
Access egress QoS policy for port-based queuing mode on 7210 SAS-Mxp
Access egress QoS policies on 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
Access egress QoS policies for SAP-based queuing mode
Access egress QoS policy for port-based queuing mode
Queue overrides for access egress QoS policies on the 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12
Configuring access egress QoS policy queue override parameters
Remark policies on 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, 7210 SAS-S 1/10GE, 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE, and 7210 SAS-T (network mode)
Egress port rate limiting
Forwarding classes
Forwarding class-to-queue ID map on 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, and 7210 SAS-T
Forwarding class-to-queue ID map on 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE
QoS policy entities
QoS policies for hybrid ports on 7210 SAS-T
QoS policies for hybrid ports on 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE
QoS policies for hybrid ports on 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12
Meters/policers
Meter/policer parameters
Meter ID
Committed information rate for meters
Peak information rate for meters
Color-aware and color-blind policers
Adaptation rule for meters
Committed burst size (for meter/policers)
Maximum burst size (for meter/policers)
Meter counters
Meter modes
QoS overrides for meters/policers
Configuration guidelines for QoS override
Configuring meter override parameters
Queue management
Queue parameters
Queue ID
CIR for queues
PIR for queues
Adaptation rule for queues
CBS and MBS for queues
Buffer pools
Buffer pools on 7210 SAS-T
Buffer pool allocation - per port MBS pool (7210 SAS-T)
Buffer pool allocation - per node MBS pool (7210 SAS-T)
Decommissioning ports with per port MBS pool
Using decommission command for buffer allocation on 7210 SAS-T devices
Configuration guidelines for use of decommission commands on 7210 SAS-T devices
Buffer pools on 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE
Buffer pools on 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12
Queue management policies for 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12
Queue management policy parameters
RED slopes in network and access-uplink mode
Tuning the shared buffer utilization calculation
Slope policies for 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE, and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE devices
Slope policy parameters
CPU queues
Schedulers
Scheduler modes on 7210 SAS-T
Port scheduler policies for 7210 SAS-T
Schedulers on 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE
Schedulers on 7210 SAS-Mxp
Schedulers on 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
Configuration notes
Discard eligibility indicator-based (DEI-based) classification and marking
DEI-based classification
DEI-based marking
Configuration guidelines
Port level egress rate-limiting
Overview
Applications
Effect of port level rate-limiting on network queue functionality
Basic configurations
Modifying port level egress-rate command
Removing port level egress-rate command
Default egress-rate values
Port level egress-rate command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Show commands
SAP egress aggregate meter
Overview
Configuration notes
Basic configurations
SAP egress aggregate meter command reference
Frame-based accounting
Overview
Frame-based accounting
Effects of enabling ingress frame-based accounting on ingress meter functionality
Effects of enabling egress frame-based accounting on network queue functionality
Accounting and statistics
Basic configurations
Enabling and disabling frame-based accounting
Default frame-based accounting values
Frame-based accounting command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Configuration commands
Network QoS policies
Overview
Overview of network QoS policies in network mode
Overview of network QoS policies in access-uplink mode
Network QoS policy in network mode
Network QoS policy (ip-interface type) behaviour for MPLS LSPs
Basic configurations
Create a network QoS policy (ip-interface type) for network mode
Example for network QoS policy of ip-interface type
Configuring network QoS policy (port type) for network mode
Default network policy values available in network mode
Resource allocation for network QoS policy
Network QoS policies resource usage examples
Example 1
Example 2
Example 3
Example 4
Example 5
Example 6
Example 7
Example 8
Network QoS policy in access-uplink mode
Basic configurations
Configuring network policy for access-uplink mode
Default network policy values available in access-uplink mode
DSCP and dot1p marking for CPU self-generated traffic
QoS for self-generated (CPU) traffic on network interfaces for the 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12
Default DSCP mapping table
Service management tasks
Deleting QoS policies
Remove a policy from the QoS configuration
Copying and overwriting network policies
Editing QoS policies
Network QoS policy command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands for MPLS EXP profile map (7210 SAS platforms operating in network mode)
Configuration commands (7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE, and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE configured in network mode)
Configuration commands (7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12)
Configuration commands (access-uplink mode)
Self-generated traffic commands (7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12)
Operational commands (network mode or access-uplink mode)
Show commands (network mode or access-uplink mode)
Show commands (7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12)
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Network QoS policy commands
Network QoS policy commands (7210 SAS-T in access-uplink mode)
Network ingress QoS policy commands
Network egress QoS policy commands
Self-generated traffic commands (7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12)
Operational commands
Show commands
Show commands (7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12)
Network queue QoS policies
Overview
Basic configurations
Create a network queue QoS policy
Applying network queue policies
Applying network queue configuration in network mode
Applying network queue configuration in access-uplink mode
Default network queue policy values
Default network queue policy values for hybrid ports on 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
Service management tasks
Deleting network queue QoS policies
Copying and overwriting network queue QoS policies
Editing network queue QoS policies
Network queue QoS policy command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands for 7210 SAS-T (in network mode and access-uplink mode)
Configuration commands for 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12
Configuration commands for 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE
Operational commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Network queue QoS policy commands
Network queue QoS policy queue commands
Operational commands
Show commands
Service ingress QoS policies
Overview
Default SAP ingress policy
SAP-ingress policy defaults
Resource allocation for SAP ingress policy
Use of index file by SAP QoS ingress policy
Use of the keyword ‟multipoint” for default meter ‟11”
Example uses of the multipoint meter
Service ingress meter selection rules
Default policy
VPLS service without meter ‟11”
VPLS service with meter ‟11”
Epipe, IES, and VPRN services without PIM
IES and VPRN services with PIM/multicast and without meter ‟11”
IES and VPRN services with PIM/multicast and meter ‟11”
Service ingress policy configuration considerations
Resource allocation for service ingress QoS policies using CAM-based classification
Resource configuration guidelines for service ingress QoS policies using CAM-based classification
Computation of resources used per SAP ingress policy for CAM-based classification
Determining the number of classification entries
Rules for a SAP in a VPLS
Rules for a SAP in a VLL, VPRN, or IES service with PIM disabled
Rules for a SAP in an IES or VPRN service with PIM/multicast enabled
Calculating the number of classification entries per FC
Determining the number of classification entries per policy (TC)
Determining the number of policers/meters per policy (TP)
Table-based classification using dot1p and IP DSCP for assigning FC and profile on SAP ingress for the 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12
IP DSCP and dot1p classification policy support
Default-FC assignment rules for SAPs in Layer 3 services
Precedence rules for DEI assignments on the 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12
Creating an IP DSCP and dot1p classification policy
CAM resource usage for IP DSCP and dot1p classification policies on the 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12
CAM resource allocation for table-based classification
Associating a DSCP or dot1p classification policy
Associating a classification policy with a SAP ingress QoS policy
Associating a classification policy with an Ethernet port
Assigning and enabling DSCP and dot1p classification policies to a SAP
Assigning and enabling policies to Epipe and VPLS SAPs
Assigning and enabling policies to IES and VPRN interface SAPs
Assigning policies to RVPLS SAPs
Create a SAP ingress policy and assign the policy to an RVPLS SAP
Table-based classification per IP Interface for routed packets
Table-based classification per port for bridged packets
Service meter for SAP ingress (7210 SAS-Mxp)
Default service meter policy
Resource usage for service meters
Examples for service meters with computation of resource usage
Calculating resources required for classification
Examples: calculating resources required for CAM-based classification
Example 1
Example 1a (default multipoint meter 11 is not used):
Example 2
Example 2a (default multipoint meter "11" is not used)
Example 3
Example 3a (default multipoint meter "11" is not used):
Example 4
Example 4a (default multipoint meter "11" is not used):
Example 5
Example 6
Example 7
Example 8
Example 9
Example 9a (default multipoint meter "11" is not used):
Example 10
Example 11
Examples: calculating resources required for IP DSCP table-based classification with CAM-based policing (7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12)
Example 1: Epipe, IES, and VPRN services using unicast traffic type
Example 2: VPLS using unicast and BUM meter with IES or VPRN using multicast
Example 3: VPLS service using unicast, broadcast, multicast, and unknown-unicast with additional FCs
Example 4: routed VPLS on access port using unicast, broadcast, multicast, and unknown-unicast with additional FCs
Example 5: routed VPLS service on a hybrid port using unicast, broadcast, multicast and unknown-unicast for some FCs
Example 6: routed VPLS on access port and hybrid port
Basic configurations
Create service ingress QoS policies
Service ingress QoS meter
Service ingress IP match criteria
Service ingress MAC match criteria
Applying service ingress policies
Epipe
VPLS
VPRN
IES
Service management tasks
Deleting QoS policies
Remove a QoS policy from service SAPs
Copying and overwriting QoS policies
Remove a policy from the QoS configuration
Editing QoS policies
Service ingress QoS policy command reference
Command hierarchy
Service ingress QoS policy commands
Table-based IP DSCP and dot1p classification policy commands for SAP ingress (7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12)
Service meter commands for SAP ingress (7210 SAS-Mxp only)
Operational commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Service ingress QoS policy commands
Service ingress QoS policy entry commands
Service ingress QoS policy forwarding class commands
IP QoS policy match commands
Service ingress MAC QoS policy match commands
Service meter QoS policy commands
IP DSCP and dot1p classification policy commands (for 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12)
Service meter commands for SAP ingress (for 7210 SAS-Mxp)
Operational commands
Show commands
Access egress QoS policies on 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE, and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE
Overview
Basic configurations
Modifying access egress QoS queues
Applying access egress QoS policies
Ethernet ports
Default access egress QoS policy values
Deleting QoS policies
Removing a policy from the QoS configuration
Access egress QoS policy command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands for 7210 SAS-T (access-uplink mode)
Configuration commands for 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE, and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE (network mode)
Operational commands
Show commands
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Access egress queue QoS policy commands
Operational commands
Show commands
Access egress QoS policies for 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12
Overview
Access egress QoS policy for SAP-based queuing mode
Access egress QoS policy for port-based queuing mode
Access egress QoS policy queue override
Basic configurations
Modifying access egress QoS queues on the 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
Applying access egress QoS policies on the 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12
Ethernet ports
Editing QoS policies
Deleting QoS policies
Removing a policy from the QoS configuration
Access egress QoS policy command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands for 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12
Show commands
Command descriptions
Generic commands
Access egress queue QoS policy commands
Show commands
Service egress policies on 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12
Overview
Basic configurations
Create a SAP egress policy
Editing QoS policies
Service egress policy command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands for 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12
Operational commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
SAP egress queue QoS policy commands
Operational commands
Show Commands
QoS port scheduler policies for 7210 SAS-T
Overview
Configuring port scheduler policies
Basic configurations
Creating a QoS port scheduler policy
Service management tasks
Copying and overwriting scheduler policies
Editing QoS policies
Schedulers on 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE
Configuring scheduler policies
QoS port scheduler policy command reference
Command hierarchies
Port scheduler policy configuration commands
Operational commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Port scheduler policy commands
Operational commands
Show commands
Schedulers on 7210 SAS-Mxp
Overview
Scheduling with SAP-based queues on access ports
Scheduling on network ports
Scheduling on hybrid port with SAP-based egress queues
Port-based scheduling and queuing on access ports
Scheduling on hybrid port with port-based SAP queues
Schedulers on 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
Scheduling with SAP-based queues on access ports
Scheduling on network ports
Scheduling on hybrid port with SAP-based egress queues
Port-based scheduling and queuing on access ports
Scheduling on hybrid port with port-based SAP queues
Slope QoS policies
Overview
Configuration guidelines
WRED support on 7210 SAS-T access-uplink and network mode, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE, and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE
Basic configurations
Create a slope QoS policy
Applying slope policies
Ports
Default slope policy values
Service management tasks
Deleting QoS policies
Ports
Remove a policy from the QoS configuration
Copying and overwriting QoS policies
Editing QoS policies
Slope QoS policy command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Operational commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Slope policy QoS commands
Slope policy QoS policy commands
RED slope commands
Slope policy QoS policy commands
Operational commands
Show commands
Queue management policies
Overview
Basic configurations
Service management tasks
Creating a queue management policy
Editing QoS policies
Queue management policy command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands for 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12
Operational commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Queue management policy QoS commands
WRED slope commands
Operational commands
Show commands
Remark policies
Overview
Configuration guidelines
Basic configurations
Creating a remark policy
Editing QoS policies
Remark policy command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands for 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE, 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE, and 7210 SAS-T in network mode
Operational commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Remark policy QoS commands
Remark policy forwarding class commands
Operational commands
Show commands
Access ingress QoS policies
Overview
Resource allocation for access ingress QoS policies
Use of index file for access ingress QoS policies
Calculating the number of QoS resources
Calculating the number of meters or policers
Determining the number of resources allocated to the policy
Example of access ingress QoS policy resource calculations
Example 1
Example 2
Example 3
Configuration guidelines for using a port-based access ingress QoS policy
Basic configurations
Editing an access ingress QoS policy configuration
Removing a policy from the QoS configuration
Deleting access ingress QoS policies
Access-ingress QoS policy command reference
Command hierarchies
Access-ingress QoS configuration commands
Command descriptions
Generic commands
Access ingress QoS policy commands
Standards and protocol support
Customer Documentation and Product Support
7210 SAS-D, Dxp, K 2F1C2T, K 2F6C4T, K 3SFP+ 8C Router Configuration Guide Release 22.9.R1
Legal notice
Getting started
About this guide
Document structure and content
7210 SAS modes of operation
7210 SAS port modes
7210 SAS-series router configuration process
Conventions
Precautionary and information messages
Options or substeps in procedures and sequential workflows
IP router configuration
Configuring IP router parameters
Interfaces
Network interface on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
System interface on 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, and 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
System interface on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Unicast Reverse Path Forwarding check on 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Unnumbered interfaces
Router ID
Autonomous systems (AS)
Proxy ARP
Internet Protocol versions
IPv6 applications for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
IPv6 applications for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
IPv6 Provider Edge router over MPLS (6PE)
6PE control plane support
6PE data plane support
DNS
Bidirectional forwarding detection for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
BFD control packet
Control packet format
BFD echo support
BFD support on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C platforms
DHCP
DHCP principles
DHCP relay
DHCP relay agent options
Option 82
Local DHCP server on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
DHCP server options
Trusted and untrusted
DHCP snooping
IGP-LDP and static route-LDP synchronization on the 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Process overview on the 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Process overview on the 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, and 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
Configuration notes
Configuration guidelines for DHCP relay and snooping
Configuring an IP router with CLI
Router configuration overview of 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, and 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
System interface on 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, and 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
Router configuration overview on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
System interface on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Network interface
Basic configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring a system name
Configuring interfaces
Configuring a system interface
Configure a network interface on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Configuring IPv6 parameters on 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Configuring an unnumbered interface
Router advertisement on 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Configuring proxy ARP
ECMP considerations
Configuration notes
Deriving the router ID
Configuring an autonomous system
Configuring Option 82 handling
Configuring a local DHCP server
Service management tasks
Changing the system name
Modifying interface parameters
Deleting a logical IP interface
IP router command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Router commands for 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, and 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
Router commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Router interface commands for 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, and 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
Router interface commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Router DHCP local user database commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Router interface IPv6 commands (supported only on 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C)
IPv6 router advertisement commands (supported only on 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C)
Show commands
Router show commands
DHCP show commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Clear commands
Router clear commands
DHCP clear commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Debug commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Router global commands
Router DHCP commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Route next-hop policy commands
Router interface commands
Router interface filter commands
Router interface ICMP commands
Interface attribute commands
Router interface IPv6 commands
IPv6 router advertisement commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Filter policies
Filter policy configuration overview
Service-based filtering
Filter policy entities
Applying filter policies
ACL on range SAPs
Creating and applying filter policies
Packet matching criteria
DSCP values
Ordering filter entries
Applying filters
Applying a filter to a SAP
Applying a filter to an IES interface
Applying a filter to a network IP interface
Configuration notes
MAC filters
IP filters
IPv6 filters
Resource usage for ingress filter policies for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
Resource usage for egress filter policies (supported only for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp)
Ingress filter policy resource usage: 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Configuring filter policies with CLI
Basic configuration
Common configuration tasks
Allocating resources for filter policies (ingress and egress)
Creating an IP filter policy
IP filter policy
IP filter entry
IP entry matching criteria
Creating an IPv6 filter policy (applicable only for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp)
IPv6 filter entry
Creating a MAC filter policy
MAC filter policy
MAC filter entry
MAC entry matching criteria
Apply IP and MAC filter policies
Apply filter policies to an IES interface
Filter management tasks
Renumbering filter policy entries
Modifying an IP filter policy
Modifying a MAC filter policy
Deleting a filter policy
From an ingress SAP
From an egress SAP
From the filter configuration
Copying filter policies
Filter command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
IP filter policy commands
IPv6 filter policy commands for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
IPv6 filter policy commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
MAC filter policy commands for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
MAC filter policy commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Generic filter commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Monitor commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Global filter commands
Filter policy commands
General filter entry commands
IP filter entry commands
MAC filter entry commands
IP filter match criteria commands
MAC filter match criteria commands
Policy and entry maintenance commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Monitor commands
Common CLI command descriptions
In this chapter
Common service commands
SAP commands
SAP command description
Standards and protocol support
Customer Documentation and Product Support
Legal notice
Getting started
About this guide
Document structure and content
7210 SAS modes of operation
7210 SAS port modes
7210 SAS-series router configuration process
Conventions
Precautionary and information messages
Options or substeps in procedures and sequential workflows
IP router configuration
Configuring IP router parameters
Interfaces
Network interface on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
System interface on 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, and 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
System interface on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Unicast Reverse Path Forwarding check on 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Unnumbered interfaces
Router ID
Autonomous systems (AS)
Proxy ARP
Internet Protocol versions
IPv6 applications for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
IPv6 applications for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
IPv6 Provider Edge router over MPLS (6PE)
6PE control plane support
6PE data plane support
DNS
Bidirectional forwarding detection for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
BFD control packet
Control packet format
BFD echo support
BFD support on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C platforms
DHCP
DHCP principles
DHCP relay
DHCP relay agent options
Option 82
Local DHCP server on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
DHCP server options
Trusted and untrusted
DHCP snooping
IGP-LDP and static route-LDP synchronization on the 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Process overview on the 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Process overview on the 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, and 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
Configuration notes
Configuration guidelines for DHCP relay and snooping
Configuring an IP router with CLI
Router configuration overview of 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, and 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
System interface on 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, and 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
Router configuration overview on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
System interface on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Network interface
Basic configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring a system name
Configuring interfaces
Configuring a system interface
Configure a network interface on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Configuring IPv6 parameters on 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Configuring an unnumbered interface
Router advertisement on 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Configuring proxy ARP
ECMP considerations
Configuration notes
Deriving the router ID
Configuring an autonomous system
Configuring Option 82 handling
Configuring a local DHCP server
Service management tasks
Changing the system name
Modifying interface parameters
Deleting a logical IP interface
IP router command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Router commands for 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, and 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
Router commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Router interface commands for 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, and 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
Router interface commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Router DHCP local user database commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Router interface IPv6 commands (supported only on 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C)
IPv6 router advertisement commands (supported only on 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C)
Show commands
Router show commands
DHCP show commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Clear commands
Router clear commands
DHCP clear commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Debug commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Router global commands
Router DHCP commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Route next-hop policy commands
Router interface commands
Router interface filter commands
Router interface ICMP commands
Interface attribute commands
Router interface IPv6 commands
IPv6 router advertisement commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Filter policies
Filter policy configuration overview
Service-based filtering
Filter policy entities
Applying filter policies
ACL on range SAPs
Creating and applying filter policies
Packet matching criteria
DSCP values
Ordering filter entries
Applying filters
Applying a filter to a SAP
Applying a filter to an IES interface
Applying a filter to a network IP interface
Configuration notes
MAC filters
IP filters
IPv6 filters
Resource usage for ingress filter policies for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
Resource usage for egress filter policies (supported only for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp)
Ingress filter policy resource usage: 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Configuring filter policies with CLI
Basic configuration
Common configuration tasks
Allocating resources for filter policies (ingress and egress)
Creating an IP filter policy
IP filter policy
IP filter entry
IP entry matching criteria
Creating an IPv6 filter policy (applicable only for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp)
IPv6 filter entry
Creating a MAC filter policy
MAC filter policy
MAC filter entry
MAC entry matching criteria
Apply IP and MAC filter policies
Apply filter policies to an IES interface
Filter management tasks
Renumbering filter policy entries
Modifying an IP filter policy
Modifying a MAC filter policy
Deleting a filter policy
From an ingress SAP
From an egress SAP
From the filter configuration
Copying filter policies
Filter command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
IP filter policy commands
IPv6 filter policy commands for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
IPv6 filter policy commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
MAC filter policy commands for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
MAC filter policy commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Generic filter commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Monitor commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Global filter commands
Filter policy commands
General filter entry commands
IP filter entry commands
MAC filter entry commands
IP filter match criteria commands
MAC filter match criteria commands
Policy and entry maintenance commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Monitor commands
Common CLI command descriptions
In this chapter
Common service commands
SAP commands
SAP command description
Standards and protocol support
Customer Documentation and Product Support
7210 SAS-Mxp, R6, R12, S, Sx, T Router Configuration Guide Release 22.9.R1
Legal notice
Getting started
About this guide
Document structure and content
7210 SAS modes of operation
7210 SAS port modes
7210 SAS router configuration process
Conventions
Precautionary and information messages
Options or substeps in procedures and sequential workflows
IP router configuration
Configuring IP router parameters
Interfaces
Secondary IPv4 addresses
Network interface
System interface
Router ID
Autonomous systems
Proxy ARP
Internet Protocol versions
IPv6 applications
IPv6 Provider Edge router over MPLS (6PE)
6PE control plane support
6PE data plane support
Bidirectional Forwarding Detection
BFD control packet
Control packet format
Echo support
BFD IPv4 support on 7210 SAS platforms
BFD IPv6 support on 7210 SAS platforms
IGP-LDP and static route-LDP synchronization
IP fragmentation
Process overview
Configuration notes
Configuring an IP router with CLI
Router configuration overview
System interface
Network interface
Basic configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring a system name
Configuring interfaces
Configuring a system interface
Configuring IPv6 parameters
Configuring router advertisement
Configuring proxy ARP
ECMP considerations
Configuration notes
Deriving the router ID
Configuring an autonomous system
Configuring static routes
Service management tasks
Changing the system name
Modifying interface parameters
Deleting a logical IP interface
IP router command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Router commands
Router BFD commands
Router interface commands
Router interface IPv6 commands
Router advertisement commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Router global commands
Router BFD commands
Router interface commands
Route next-hop policy commands
Router interface filter commands
Router interface ICMP commands
Interface attribute commands
Router interface IPv6 commands
Router advertisement commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
VRRP
VRRP overview
VRRP components
Virtual router
IP address owner
Primary and secondary IP addresses
Virtual router master state
Virtual router backup
Owner and non-owner VRRP
Configurable parameters
Virtual router ID (VRID)
Priority
IP addresses
Message interval and master inheritance
Skew time
Master down interval
Preempt mode
VRRP message authentication
Authentication type 0 — no authentication
Authentication type 1 — simple text password
Authentication failure
Authentication data
Virtual MAC address
VRRP advertisement message IP address list verification
IPv6 virtual router instance operationally up
Policies
VRRP priority control policies
VRRP virtual router policy constraints
VRRP virtual router instance base priority
VRRP priority control policy delta in-use priority limit
VRRP priority control policy priority events
Priority event hold-set timers
Port down priority event
LAG degrade priority event
Host unreachable priority event
Route unknown priority event
VRRP non-owner accessibility
Non-owner access ping reply
Non-owner access Telnet
Non-owner access SSH
VRRP configuration process overview
Configuration notes
General
Configuring VRRP with CLI
VRRP configuration overview
Preconfiguration requirements
Basic VRRP configurations
VRRP policy
VRRP IES service parameters
VRRP router interface parameters
Common configuration tasks
Creating interface parameters
Configuring VRRP policy components
Configuring service VRRP parameters
Non-owner VRRP example
Owner service VRRP example
Configuring router interface VRRP parameters
Router interface VRRP non-owner
Router interface VRRP owner
VRRP configuration management tasks
Modifying a VRRP policy
Deleting a VRRP policy
Modifying service and interface VRRP parameters
Modifying non-owner parameters
Modifying owner parameters
Deleting VRRP on an interface or service
VRRP command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
VRRP network interface commands
VRRP IPv6 interface commands
VRRP priority control event policy commands
Show commands
Monitor commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Interface configuration commands
Priority policy commands
Priority policy event commands
Priority policy port down event commands
Priority policy LAG events commands
Priority policy host unreachable event commands
Priority policy route unknown event commands
Show commands
Monitor commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Filter policies
Filter policy configuration overview
Service and network IP interface-based filtering
Filter policy entities
Applying filter policies
ACL on range SAPs
Configuration guidelines for Routed VPLS and ACLs
Creating and applying policies
Packet matching criteria
DSCP values
Ordering filter entries
Applying filters
Applying a filter to a SAP
Applying a filter to a network IP interface
Configuration notes
MAC filters
IP filters
IPv6 filters
Resource usage for ingress filter policies
Resource usage for egress filter policies
Configuring filter policies with CLI
Basic configuration
Common configuration tasks
Creating an IP filter policy
IP filter policy
IP filter entry
IP entry matching criteria
Creating an IPv6 filter policy
IPv6 filter policy
IPv6 filter entry
Creating a MAC filter policy
MAC filter policy
MAC filter entry
MAC entry matching criteria
Apply IP and MAC filter policies
Apply an IPv6 filter policy to VPLS
Applying filter policies to a network IP interface
Applying a filter policy to an IP interface
Filter management tasks
Renumbering filter policy entries
Modifying an IP filter policy
Modifying an IPv6 filter policy
Modifying a MAC filter policy
Detaching/deleting a filter policy
From an ingress SAP
From an egress SAP
From a network interface
From the filter configuration
Copying filter policies
Filter command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
IP filter policy commands
IPv6 filter policy commands
MAC filter policy commands
Generic filter commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Monitor commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Global filter commands
Filter policy commands
General filter entry commands
IP filter entry commands
MAC filter entry commands
IP filter match criteria
MAC filter match criteria
Policy and entry maintenance commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Monitor commands
Cflowd
Cflowd overview
Operation
Version 8
Version 9
Version 10
Cflowd configuration process overview
Configuration notes
Configuring cflowd with CLI
Cflowd configuration overview
Traffic sampling
Collectors
Aggregation
Basic cflowd configuration
Common configuration tasks
Global cflowd components
Configuring cflowd
Enabling cflowd
Configuring global cflowd parameters
Configuring cflowd collectors
Version 9 and Version 10 templates
Specifying cflowd options on an IP interface
Interface configurations
Service interfaces
Dependencies
Cflowd configuration management tasks
Modifying global cflowd components
Modifying cflowd collector parameters
Cflowd configuration command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Show commands
Tools commands
Clear commands
Command descriptions
Global commands
Show commands
Tools commands
Clear commands
Common CLI command descriptions
In this chapter
Common service commands
SAP syntax
Standards and protocol support
Customer Documentation and Product Support
Legal notice
Getting started
About this guide
Document structure and content
7210 SAS modes of operation
7210 SAS port modes
7210 SAS router configuration process
Conventions
Precautionary and information messages
Options or substeps in procedures and sequential workflows
IP router configuration
Configuring IP router parameters
Interfaces
Secondary IPv4 addresses
Network interface
System interface
Router ID
Autonomous systems
Proxy ARP
Internet Protocol versions
IPv6 applications
IPv6 Provider Edge router over MPLS (6PE)
6PE control plane support
6PE data plane support
Bidirectional Forwarding Detection
BFD control packet
Control packet format
Echo support
BFD IPv4 support on 7210 SAS platforms
BFD IPv6 support on 7210 SAS platforms
IGP-LDP and static route-LDP synchronization
IP fragmentation
Process overview
Configuration notes
Configuring an IP router with CLI
Router configuration overview
System interface
Network interface
Basic configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring a system name
Configuring interfaces
Configuring a system interface
Configuring IPv6 parameters
Configuring router advertisement
Configuring proxy ARP
ECMP considerations
Configuration notes
Deriving the router ID
Configuring an autonomous system
Configuring static routes
Service management tasks
Changing the system name
Modifying interface parameters
Deleting a logical IP interface
IP router command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Router commands
Router BFD commands
Router interface commands
Router interface IPv6 commands
Router advertisement commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Router global commands
Router BFD commands
Router interface commands
Route next-hop policy commands
Router interface filter commands
Router interface ICMP commands
Interface attribute commands
Router interface IPv6 commands
Router advertisement commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
VRRP
VRRP overview
VRRP components
Virtual router
IP address owner
Primary and secondary IP addresses
Virtual router master state
Virtual router backup
Owner and non-owner VRRP
Configurable parameters
Virtual router ID (VRID)
Priority
IP addresses
Message interval and master inheritance
Skew time
Master down interval
Preempt mode
VRRP message authentication
Authentication type 0 — no authentication
Authentication type 1 — simple text password
Authentication failure
Authentication data
Virtual MAC address
VRRP advertisement message IP address list verification
IPv6 virtual router instance operationally up
Policies
VRRP priority control policies
VRRP virtual router policy constraints
VRRP virtual router instance base priority
VRRP priority control policy delta in-use priority limit
VRRP priority control policy priority events
Priority event hold-set timers
Port down priority event
LAG degrade priority event
Host unreachable priority event
Route unknown priority event
VRRP non-owner accessibility
Non-owner access ping reply
Non-owner access Telnet
Non-owner access SSH
VRRP configuration process overview
Configuration notes
General
Configuring VRRP with CLI
VRRP configuration overview
Preconfiguration requirements
Basic VRRP configurations
VRRP policy
VRRP IES service parameters
VRRP router interface parameters
Common configuration tasks
Creating interface parameters
Configuring VRRP policy components
Configuring service VRRP parameters
Non-owner VRRP example
Owner service VRRP example
Configuring router interface VRRP parameters
Router interface VRRP non-owner
Router interface VRRP owner
VRRP configuration management tasks
Modifying a VRRP policy
Deleting a VRRP policy
Modifying service and interface VRRP parameters
Modifying non-owner parameters
Modifying owner parameters
Deleting VRRP on an interface or service
VRRP command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
VRRP network interface commands
VRRP IPv6 interface commands
VRRP priority control event policy commands
Show commands
Monitor commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Interface configuration commands
Priority policy commands
Priority policy event commands
Priority policy port down event commands
Priority policy LAG events commands
Priority policy host unreachable event commands
Priority policy route unknown event commands
Show commands
Monitor commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Filter policies
Filter policy configuration overview
Service and network IP interface-based filtering
Filter policy entities
Applying filter policies
ACL on range SAPs
Configuration guidelines for Routed VPLS and ACLs
Creating and applying policies
Packet matching criteria
DSCP values
Ordering filter entries
Applying filters
Applying a filter to a SAP
Applying a filter to a network IP interface
Configuration notes
MAC filters
IP filters
IPv6 filters
Resource usage for ingress filter policies
Resource usage for egress filter policies
Configuring filter policies with CLI
Basic configuration
Common configuration tasks
Creating an IP filter policy
IP filter policy
IP filter entry
IP entry matching criteria
Creating an IPv6 filter policy
IPv6 filter policy
IPv6 filter entry
Creating a MAC filter policy
MAC filter policy
MAC filter entry
MAC entry matching criteria
Apply IP and MAC filter policies
Apply an IPv6 filter policy to VPLS
Applying filter policies to a network IP interface
Applying a filter policy to an IP interface
Filter management tasks
Renumbering filter policy entries
Modifying an IP filter policy
Modifying an IPv6 filter policy
Modifying a MAC filter policy
Detaching/deleting a filter policy
From an ingress SAP
From an egress SAP
From a network interface
From the filter configuration
Copying filter policies
Filter command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
IP filter policy commands
IPv6 filter policy commands
MAC filter policy commands
Generic filter commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Monitor commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Global filter commands
Filter policy commands
General filter entry commands
IP filter entry commands
MAC filter entry commands
IP filter match criteria
MAC filter match criteria
Policy and entry maintenance commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Monitor commands
Cflowd
Cflowd overview
Operation
Version 8
Version 9
Version 10
Cflowd configuration process overview
Configuration notes
Configuring cflowd with CLI
Cflowd configuration overview
Traffic sampling
Collectors
Aggregation
Basic cflowd configuration
Common configuration tasks
Global cflowd components
Configuring cflowd
Enabling cflowd
Configuring global cflowd parameters
Configuring cflowd collectors
Version 9 and Version 10 templates
Specifying cflowd options on an IP interface
Interface configurations
Service interfaces
Dependencies
Cflowd configuration management tasks
Modifying global cflowd components
Modifying cflowd collector parameters
Cflowd configuration command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Show commands
Tools commands
Clear commands
Command descriptions
Global commands
Show commands
Tools commands
Clear commands
Common CLI command descriptions
In this chapter
Common service commands
SAP syntax
Standards and protocol support
Customer Documentation and Product Support
7210 SAS-D, Dxp, K 2F1C2T Routing Protocols Guide Release 22.9.R1
Legal notice
Getting started
About this guide
Document structure and content
7210 SAS modes of operation
7210 SAS port modes
7210 SAS router configuration process
Conventions
Precautionary and information messages
Options or substeps in procedures and sequential workflows
Route policies
Configuring route policies
Policy statements
Default action behavior
Denied IP prefixes
When to use route policies
Configuration notes
General
Configuring route policies with CLI
Route policy configuration overview
When to create routing policies
Default route policy actions
Policy evaluation
Basic configurations
Configuring route policy components
Beginning the policy statement
Creating a route policy
Configuring a default action
Configuring an entry
Route policy configuration management tasks
Editing policy statements and parameters
Deleting an entry
Deleting a policy statement
Route policy command reference
Command hierarchies
Route policy configuration commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Route policy options
Route policy prefix commands
Route policy entry match commands
Route policy action commands
Show commands
Standards and protocol support
Customer Documentation and Product Support
Legal notice
Getting started
About this guide
Document structure and content
7210 SAS modes of operation
7210 SAS port modes
7210 SAS router configuration process
Conventions
Precautionary and information messages
Options or substeps in procedures and sequential workflows
Route policies
Configuring route policies
Policy statements
Default action behavior
Denied IP prefixes
When to use route policies
Configuration notes
General
Configuring route policies with CLI
Route policy configuration overview
When to create routing policies
Default route policy actions
Policy evaluation
Basic configurations
Configuring route policy components
Beginning the policy statement
Creating a route policy
Configuring a default action
Configuring an entry
Route policy configuration management tasks
Editing policy statements and parameters
Deleting an entry
Deleting a policy statement
Route policy command reference
Command hierarchies
Route policy configuration commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Route policy options
Route policy prefix commands
Route policy entry match commands
Route policy action commands
Show commands
Standards and protocol support
Customer Documentation and Product Support
7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, K 3SFP+ 8C Routing Protocols Guide Release 22.9.R1
Legal notice
Getting started
About this guide
Document structure and content
7210 SAS modes of operation
7210 SAS port modes
7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C routing configuration process
Conventions
Precautionary and information messages
Options or substeps in procedures and sequential workflows
Multicast
Overview of multicast
Multicast models (SSM)
SSM
Multicast features
IGMP
IGMP versions and interoperability requirements
IGMP version transition
SSM groups
PIM-SM
PIM-SM functions
Phase one
Phase two
Phase three
Encapsulating data packets in the register tunnel
PIM bootstrap router mechanism
PIM-SM routing policies
Reverse path forwarding checks
Anycast RP for PIM-SM
Implementation
Distributing PIM joins over multiple ECMP paths
Multicast debugging tools
Mtrace
Finding the last hop router
Directing the response
Mrinfo
Configuration guidelines for 7210 SAS
Configuring multicast parameters with CLI
Multicast configuration overview
Basic configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring IGMP parameters
Enabling IGMP
Configuring an IGMP interface
Configuring static parameters
Configuring SSM translation
Configuring PIM parameters
Enabling PIM
Configuring PIM interface parameters
Importing PIM join or register policies
Disabling IGMP or PIM
Multicast command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
IGMP commands
PIM commands
Operational commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Multicast commands
Router IGMP commands
Router PIM commands
Operational commands
Show commands
IGMP commands
Show router PIM commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Debug IGMP commands
Debug PIM commands
OSPF
Configuring OSPF
OSPF areas
Backbone area
Stub area
Not-So-Stubby Area
OSPF super backbone
Sham links
Implementing the OSPF super backbone
Loop avoidance
DN-BIT
Route tag
OSPFv3 authentication
OSPFv3 graceful restart helper
Virtual links
Neighbors and adjacencies
Link-state advertisements
Metrics
Authentication
Multiple OSPF instances
Route export policies for OSPF
Preventing route redistribution loops
IP subnets
Preconfiguration recommendations
IP Fast-Reroute (IP FRR) for OSPF and IS-IS prefixes
IP FRR/LFA configuration
Reducing the scope of the LFA calculation by SPF
ECMP considerations
IP FRR and RSVP shortcut (IGP shortcut)
IP FRR and BGP next-hop resolution
OSPF and IS-IS support for Loop-Free Alternate calculation
Loop-Free Alternate calculation in the presence of IGP shortcuts
Loop-Free Alternate calculation for inter-area/inter-level prefixes
Loop-Free Alternate Shortest Path First (LFA SPF) policies
Configuration of route next-hop policy template
Configuring affinity or admin group constraint in route next-hop policy
Configuring SRLG group constraint in route next-hop policy
Interaction of IP and MPLS admin group and SRLG
Configuring protection type and next-hop type preference in route next-hop policy template
Application of route next-hop policy template to an interface
Excluding prefixes from LFA SPF
Modification to LFA next-hop selection algorithm
Segment routing in shortest path forwarding
LFA protection using segment routing backup node SID
Detailed operation of LFA protection using backup node SID
Duplicate SID handling
OSPF control plane extensions
OSPF configuration process overview
Configuration notes
General
OSPF defaults
Configuring OSPF with CLI
OSPF configuration guidelines
Basic OSPF configuration
Configuring the router ID
Configuring OSPF components
Configuring OSPF parameters
Configuring OSPFv3 parameters
Configuring an OSPF and OSPFv3 area
Configuring an OSPF and OSPFv3 stub area
Configuring a Not-So-Stubby Area
Configuring a virtual link
Configuring an interface
Configuring authentication
Assigning a designated router
Configuring route summaries
Configuring route preferences
OSPF configuration management tasks
Modifying a router ID
Deleting a router ID
Modifying OSPF parameters
OSPF command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands for OSPF
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
OSPF global commands
OSPF area commands
Interface/virtual link commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
IS-IS
Configuring IS-IS
Routing
IS-IS frequently used terms
ISO network addressing
IS-IS PDU configuration
IS-IS operations
IS-IS route summarization
IS-IS multi-topology for IPv6
IS-IS administrative tags
Setting route tags
Using route tags
Segment routing in shortest path forwarding
Segment routing operational procedures
Prefix advertisement and resolution
Error and resource exhaustion handling
Procedure 1: Resolving received SID indexes or labels to different routes of the same prefix within the same IGP instance
Procedure 2: Checking for SID error prior to programming ILM and NHLFE
Procedure 3: Programming ILM/NHLFE for duplicate prefix-SID indexes/labels for different prefixes
Procedure 4: Programming ILM/NHLFE for the same prefix across IGP instances
Procedure 5: Handling ILM resource exhaustion while assigning an SID index/label
Procedure 6: Handling ILM/NHLFE/other IOM or CPM resource exhaustion while resolving or programming an SID index/label
Segment routing tunnel management
Tunnel MTU determination
Remote LFA with segment routing
Data path support
Hash label
Control protocol changes
IS-IS control protocol changes
OSPF control protocol changes
BGP label route resolution using segment routing tunnels
Service packet forwarding with segment routing
Mirror services
IGP-LDP synchronization
IS-IS configuration process overview
Configuration notes
General
Configuring IS-IS with CLI
IS-IS configuration overview
Router levels
Area address attributes
Interface level capability
Route leaking
Basic IS-IS configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring IS-IS components
Enabling IS-IS
Modifying router-level parameters
Configuring ISO area addresses
Configuring global IS-IS parameters
Migration to IS-IS multi-topology
Configuring interface parameters
Example: configuring a Level 1 area
Example: modifying a router's level capability
IS-IS configuration management tasks
Disabling IS-IS
Removing IS-IS
Modifying global IS-IS parameters
Modifying IS-IS interface parameters
Configuring leaking
Redistributing external IS-IS routers
IS-IS command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Global commands
Interface command
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
IS-IS configuration commands
Generic commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
BGP
BGP overview
BGP communication
Message types
Group configuration and peers
Hierarchical levels
Route reflection
Fast external failover
Sending of BGP communities
ECMP and BGP route tunnels
Next-hop resolution of BGP labeled routes to tunnels
VPN-IPv4 and VPN-IPv6 route resolution
Route selection criteria
BGP path attributes
NEXT_HOP attribute
Next-hop indirection
BGP Routing Information Base
LOC-RIB features
BGP fast reroute
Calculating backup paths
Failure detection and switchover to the backup path
RIB-OUT features
BGP export policies
Outbound Route Filtering
RT constrained route distribution
Minimum Route Advertisement Interval
Advertise-inactive
Split-horizon
Add-path
Receiving multiple paths per prefix from a BGP peer
Path selection with add-paths
BGP decision process with add-path
Advertising multiple paths using add-path
Limiting the number of paths per prefix
AIGP metric
Command interactions and dependencies
Changing the ASN
Changing the local ASN
Changing the router ID at the configuration level
Hold time and keep alive timer dependencies
Import and export route policies
Route damping and route policies
AS Override
Configuration guideline for BGP
BGP configuration process overview
Configuration notes
General
BGP defaults
BGP MIB notes
Configuring BGP with CLI
BGP configuration overview
Preconfiguration requirements
BGP hierarchy
Internal and external BGP configurations
Basic BGP configuration
Common configuration tasks
Creating an autonomous system
Configuring a router ID
BGP components
Configuring BGP
Configuring group attributes
Configuring neighbor attributes
Configuring AIGP
BGP configuration management tasks
Modifying an ASN
Modifying the BGP router ID
Modifying the router-level router ID
Deleting a neighbor
Deleting groups
Editing BGP parameters
BGP command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Global BGP commands
Group BGP commands
Neighbor BGP commands
Other BGP-related commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Other BGP-related commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Route policies
Configuring route policies
Policy statements
Default action behavior
Denied IP prefixes
Controlling route flapping
Regular expressions
BGP and OSPF route policy support
BGP route policies
Re-advertised route policies
When to use route policies
Route policy configuration process overview
Configuration notes
General
Configuring route policies with CLI
Route policy configuration overview
When to create routing policies
Default route policy actions
Policy evaluation
Damping
Basic configurations
Configuring route policy components
Beginning the policy statement
Creating a route policy
Configuring a default action
Configuring an entry
Configuring damping
Configuring a prefix list
Route policy configuration management tasks
Editing policy statements and parameters
Deleting an entry
Deleting a policy statement
Use of route policies for IGMP filtering
Route policy command reference
Command hierarchies
Route policy configuration commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Route policy command reference
Generic commands
Route policy options
Route policy damping commands
Route policy prefix commands
Route policy entry match commands
Route policy action commands
Show commands
Standards and protocol support
Customer Documentation and Product Support
Legal notice
Getting started
About this guide
Document structure and content
7210 SAS modes of operation
7210 SAS port modes
7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C routing configuration process
Conventions
Precautionary and information messages
Options or substeps in procedures and sequential workflows
Multicast
Overview of multicast
Multicast models (SSM)
SSM
Multicast features
IGMP
IGMP versions and interoperability requirements
IGMP version transition
SSM groups
PIM-SM
PIM-SM functions
Phase one
Phase two
Phase three
Encapsulating data packets in the register tunnel
PIM bootstrap router mechanism
PIM-SM routing policies
Reverse path forwarding checks
Anycast RP for PIM-SM
Implementation
Distributing PIM joins over multiple ECMP paths
Multicast debugging tools
Mtrace
Finding the last hop router
Directing the response
Mrinfo
Configuration guidelines for 7210 SAS
Configuring multicast parameters with CLI
Multicast configuration overview
Basic configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring IGMP parameters
Enabling IGMP
Configuring an IGMP interface
Configuring static parameters
Configuring SSM translation
Configuring PIM parameters
Enabling PIM
Configuring PIM interface parameters
Importing PIM join or register policies
Disabling IGMP or PIM
Multicast command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
IGMP commands
PIM commands
Operational commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Multicast commands
Router IGMP commands
Router PIM commands
Operational commands
Show commands
IGMP commands
Show router PIM commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Debug IGMP commands
Debug PIM commands
OSPF
Configuring OSPF
OSPF areas
Backbone area
Stub area
Not-So-Stubby Area
OSPF super backbone
Sham links
Implementing the OSPF super backbone
Loop avoidance
DN-BIT
Route tag
OSPFv3 authentication
OSPFv3 graceful restart helper
Virtual links
Neighbors and adjacencies
Link-state advertisements
Metrics
Authentication
Multiple OSPF instances
Route export policies for OSPF
Preventing route redistribution loops
IP subnets
Preconfiguration recommendations
IP Fast-Reroute (IP FRR) for OSPF and IS-IS prefixes
IP FRR/LFA configuration
Reducing the scope of the LFA calculation by SPF
ECMP considerations
IP FRR and RSVP shortcut (IGP shortcut)
IP FRR and BGP next-hop resolution
OSPF and IS-IS support for Loop-Free Alternate calculation
Loop-Free Alternate calculation in the presence of IGP shortcuts
Loop-Free Alternate calculation for inter-area/inter-level prefixes
Loop-Free Alternate Shortest Path First (LFA SPF) policies
Configuration of route next-hop policy template
Configuring affinity or admin group constraint in route next-hop policy
Configuring SRLG group constraint in route next-hop policy
Interaction of IP and MPLS admin group and SRLG
Configuring protection type and next-hop type preference in route next-hop policy template
Application of route next-hop policy template to an interface
Excluding prefixes from LFA SPF
Modification to LFA next-hop selection algorithm
Segment routing in shortest path forwarding
LFA protection using segment routing backup node SID
Detailed operation of LFA protection using backup node SID
Duplicate SID handling
OSPF control plane extensions
OSPF configuration process overview
Configuration notes
General
OSPF defaults
Configuring OSPF with CLI
OSPF configuration guidelines
Basic OSPF configuration
Configuring the router ID
Configuring OSPF components
Configuring OSPF parameters
Configuring OSPFv3 parameters
Configuring an OSPF and OSPFv3 area
Configuring an OSPF and OSPFv3 stub area
Configuring a Not-So-Stubby Area
Configuring a virtual link
Configuring an interface
Configuring authentication
Assigning a designated router
Configuring route summaries
Configuring route preferences
OSPF configuration management tasks
Modifying a router ID
Deleting a router ID
Modifying OSPF parameters
OSPF command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands for OSPF
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
OSPF global commands
OSPF area commands
Interface/virtual link commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
IS-IS
Configuring IS-IS
Routing
IS-IS frequently used terms
ISO network addressing
IS-IS PDU configuration
IS-IS operations
IS-IS route summarization
IS-IS multi-topology for IPv6
IS-IS administrative tags
Setting route tags
Using route tags
Segment routing in shortest path forwarding
Segment routing operational procedures
Prefix advertisement and resolution
Error and resource exhaustion handling
Procedure 1: Resolving received SID indexes or labels to different routes of the same prefix within the same IGP instance
Procedure 2: Checking for SID error prior to programming ILM and NHLFE
Procedure 3: Programming ILM/NHLFE for duplicate prefix-SID indexes/labels for different prefixes
Procedure 4: Programming ILM/NHLFE for the same prefix across IGP instances
Procedure 5: Handling ILM resource exhaustion while assigning an SID index/label
Procedure 6: Handling ILM/NHLFE/other IOM or CPM resource exhaustion while resolving or programming an SID index/label
Segment routing tunnel management
Tunnel MTU determination
Remote LFA with segment routing
Data path support
Hash label
Control protocol changes
IS-IS control protocol changes
OSPF control protocol changes
BGP label route resolution using segment routing tunnels
Service packet forwarding with segment routing
Mirror services
IGP-LDP synchronization
IS-IS configuration process overview
Configuration notes
General
Configuring IS-IS with CLI
IS-IS configuration overview
Router levels
Area address attributes
Interface level capability
Route leaking
Basic IS-IS configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring IS-IS components
Enabling IS-IS
Modifying router-level parameters
Configuring ISO area addresses
Configuring global IS-IS parameters
Migration to IS-IS multi-topology
Configuring interface parameters
Example: configuring a Level 1 area
Example: modifying a router's level capability
IS-IS configuration management tasks
Disabling IS-IS
Removing IS-IS
Modifying global IS-IS parameters
Modifying IS-IS interface parameters
Configuring leaking
Redistributing external IS-IS routers
IS-IS command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Global commands
Interface command
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
IS-IS configuration commands
Generic commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
BGP
BGP overview
BGP communication
Message types
Group configuration and peers
Hierarchical levels
Route reflection
Fast external failover
Sending of BGP communities
ECMP and BGP route tunnels
Next-hop resolution of BGP labeled routes to tunnels
VPN-IPv4 and VPN-IPv6 route resolution
Route selection criteria
BGP path attributes
NEXT_HOP attribute
Next-hop indirection
BGP Routing Information Base
LOC-RIB features
BGP fast reroute
Calculating backup paths
Failure detection and switchover to the backup path
RIB-OUT features
BGP export policies
Outbound Route Filtering
RT constrained route distribution
Minimum Route Advertisement Interval
Advertise-inactive
Split-horizon
Add-path
Receiving multiple paths per prefix from a BGP peer
Path selection with add-paths
BGP decision process with add-path
Advertising multiple paths using add-path
Limiting the number of paths per prefix
AIGP metric
Command interactions and dependencies
Changing the ASN
Changing the local ASN
Changing the router ID at the configuration level
Hold time and keep alive timer dependencies
Import and export route policies
Route damping and route policies
AS Override
Configuration guideline for BGP
BGP configuration process overview
Configuration notes
General
BGP defaults
BGP MIB notes
Configuring BGP with CLI
BGP configuration overview
Preconfiguration requirements
BGP hierarchy
Internal and external BGP configurations
Basic BGP configuration
Common configuration tasks
Creating an autonomous system
Configuring a router ID
BGP components
Configuring BGP
Configuring group attributes
Configuring neighbor attributes
Configuring AIGP
BGP configuration management tasks
Modifying an ASN
Modifying the BGP router ID
Modifying the router-level router ID
Deleting a neighbor
Deleting groups
Editing BGP parameters
BGP command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Global BGP commands
Group BGP commands
Neighbor BGP commands
Other BGP-related commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Other BGP-related commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Route policies
Configuring route policies
Policy statements
Default action behavior
Denied IP prefixes
Controlling route flapping
Regular expressions
BGP and OSPF route policy support
BGP route policies
Re-advertised route policies
When to use route policies
Route policy configuration process overview
Configuration notes
General
Configuring route policies with CLI
Route policy configuration overview
When to create routing policies
Default route policy actions
Policy evaluation
Damping
Basic configurations
Configuring route policy components
Beginning the policy statement
Creating a route policy
Configuring a default action
Configuring an entry
Configuring damping
Configuring a prefix list
Route policy configuration management tasks
Editing policy statements and parameters
Deleting an entry
Deleting a policy statement
Use of route policies for IGMP filtering
Route policy command reference
Command hierarchies
Route policy configuration commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Route policy command reference
Generic commands
Route policy options
Route policy damping commands
Route policy prefix commands
Route policy entry match commands
Route policy action commands
Show commands
Standards and protocol support
Customer Documentation and Product Support
7210 SAS-Mxp, R6, R12, S, Sx, T Routing Protocols Guide Release 22.9.R1
Legal notice
Getting started
About this guide
Document structure and content
7210 SAS modes of operation
7210 SAS port modes
7210 SAS router configuration process
Conventions
Precautionary and information messages
Options or substeps in procedures and sequential workflows
Multicast
Overview of multicast
Multicast models (SSM)
SSM
Multicast features
IGMP
IGMP versions and interoperability requirements
IGMP version transition
SSM groups
PIM-SM
PIM-SM functions
Phase one
Phase two
Phase three
Encapsulating data packets in the register tunnel
PIM bootstrap router mechanism
PIM-SM routing policies
Reverse Path Forwarding checks
Anycast RP for PIM-SM
Implementation
Distributing PIM joins over multiple ECMP paths
MSDP
Anycast RPs for MSDP
MSDP procedure
MSDP peering scenarios
MSDP peer groups
MSDP mesh groups
MSDP routing policies
Draft-Rosen multicast in VPNs
Dynamic multicast signaling over P2MP LDP
Multicast debugging tools
Mtrace
Finding the last hop router
Directing the response
Mrinfo
Configuration guidelines for 7210 SAS
Configuring multicast parameters with CLI
Multicast configuration overview
Basic configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring IGMP parameters
Enabling IGMP
Configuring an IGMP interface
Configuring static parameters
Configuring SSM translation
Configuring PIM parameters
Enabling PIM
Configuring PIM interface parameters
Importing PIM join or register policies
Configuring MSDP parameters
Disabling IGMP or PIM
Disabling MSDP
Multicast command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
IGMP commands
PIM commands
MSDP commands
Operational commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Multicast commands
Router IGMP commands
Router PIM commands
MSDP commands
Operational commands
Show commands
IGMP commands
Router PIM commands
MSDP commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Debug IGMP commands
Debug PIM commands
Debug MSDP commands
RIP
RIP overview
RIP features
RIP version types
RIPv2 authentication
Metrics
Timers
Import and export policies
RIP packet format
RIPv1 format
RIPv2 format
Hierarchical levels
RIP configuration process overview
Configuration notes
General
Configuring RIP with CLI
RIP configuration overview
Preconfiguration requirements
RIP hierarchy
Basic RIP configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring interfaces
Configuring a route policy
Configuring RIP parameters
Configuring global-level parameters
Configuring group-level parameters
Configuring neighbor-level parameters
RIP configuration management tasks
Modifying RIP parameters
Deleting a group
Deleting a neighbor
RIP command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Group commands
Neighbor commands
Show RIP commands
Clear RIP commands
Debug RIP commands
Command descriptions
RIP configuration commands
Generic commands
RIP commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug RIP commands
OSPF
Configuring OSPF
OSPF areas
Backbone area
Stub area
Not-So-Stubby Area
OSPF super backbone
Sham links
Implementing the OSPF super backbone
Loop avoidance
DN-BIT
Route tag
Sham links
OSPFv3 authentication
Virtual links
Neighbors and adjacencies
Link-state advertisements
Metrics
Authentication
Multiple OSPF instances
Route export policies for OSPF
Preventing route redistribution loops
IP subnets
Preconfiguration recommendations
IP Fast-Reroute (IP FRR) for OSPF and IS-IS prefixes
LFA configuration
Reducing the scope of the LFA calculation by SPF
ECMP considerations
OSPF and IS-IS support for Loop-Free Alternate calculation
Loop-Free Alternate Shortest Path First (LFA SPF) policies
Configuration of route next-hop policy template
Configuring affinity or admin group constraint in route next-hop policy
Configuring SRLG group constraint in route next-hop policy
Interaction of IP and MPLS admin group and SRLG
Configuring protection type and next-hop type preference in route next-hop policy template
Application of route next-hop policy template to an interface
Excluding prefixes from LFA SPF
Modification to LFA next-hop selection algorithm
Segment routing in Shortest Path Forwarding
LFA protection using segment routing backup node SID
Detailed operation of LFA protection using backup node SID
Duplicate SID handling
OSPF control plane extensions
OSPF configuration process overview
Configuration notes
General
OSPF defaults
Configuring OSPF with CLI
OSPF configuration guidelines
Basic OSPF configuration
Configuring the router ID
Configuring OSPF components
Configuring OSPF parameters
Configuring an OSPF area
Configuring a stub area
Configuring a Not-So-Stubby Area
Configuring a virtual link
Configuring an interface
Configuring authentication
Assigning a designated router
Configuring route summaries
Configuring route preferences
OSPF configuration management tasks
Modifying a router ID
Deleting a router ID
Modifying OSPF parameters
OSPF command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands for OSPF
Configuration commands for OSPF3
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
OSPF global commands
OSPF area commands
Interface and virtual link commands
Show commands
Clear commands
OSPF debug commands
IS-IS
Configuring IS-IS
Routing
IS-IS frequently used terms
ISO network addressing
IS-IS PDU configuration
IS-IS operations
IS-IS route summarization
IS-IS multi-topology for IPv6
IS-IS administrative tags
Setting route tags
Using route tags
Segment routing in Shortest Path Forwarding
Segment routing operational procedures
Prefix advertisement and resolution
Error and resource exhaustion handling
Procedure 1: Providing support of multiple topologies for the same destination prefix
Procedure 2: Resolving received SID indexes or labels to different routes of the same prefix within the same IGP instance
Procedure 3: Checking for SID error before programming ILM and NHLFE
Procedure 4: Programming ILM/NHLFE for duplicate prefix-SID indexes/labels for different prefixes
Procedure 5: Programming ILM/NHLFE for the same prefix across IGP instances
Procedure 6: Handling ILM resource exhaustion while assigning an SID index/label
Procedure 7: Handling ILM/NHLFE/other IOM or CPM resource exhaustion while resolving or programming an SID index/label
Segment routing tunnel management
Tunnel MTU determination
Remote LFA with segment routing
Datapath support
Hash label
Control protocol changes
IS-IS control protocol changes
OSPF control protocol changes
BGP label route resolution using segment routing tunnels
Service packet forwarding with segment routing
Mirror services
IGP-LDP synchronization
IS-IS import policy on the 7210 SAS-Mxp
IS-IS configuration process overview
Configuration notes
Configuring IS-IS with CLI
IS-IS configuration overview
Router levels
Area address attributes
Interface level capability
Route leaking
Basic IS-IS configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring IS-IS components
Enabling IS-IS
Modifying router-level parameters
Configuring ISO area addresses
Configuring global IS-IS parameters
Configuring interface parameters
Example: configuring a Level 1 area
Example: modifying a router level capability
IS-IS configuration management tasks
Disabling IS-IS
Removing IS-IS
Modifying global IS-IS parameters
Modifying IS-IS interface parameters
Configuring leaking
Redistributing external IS-IS routers
IS-IS command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Global commands
Interface commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
IS-IS configuration commands
Generic commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
BGP
BGP overview
BGP communication
Message types
Group configuration and peers
Hierarchical levels
Route reflection
Fast external failover
Sending of BGP communities
ECMP and BGP route tunnels
Next-hop resolution of BGP labeled routes to tunnels
VPN-IPv4 and VPN-IPv6 route resolution
Route selection criteria
Enabling best external
BGP decision process with best external
Advertisement rules with best external
Displaying best-external routes
BGP path attributes
NEXT_HOP attribute
Next-hop indirection
BGP Routing Information Base
LOC-RIB features
BGP fast reroute
Calculating backup paths
Failure detection and switchover to the backup path
BGP fast reroute in a VPRN
BGP fast reroute in a VPRN configuration
RIB-OUT features
BGP export policies
Outbound Route Filtering
RT constrained route distribution
Minimum Route Advertisement Interval
Advertise-inactive
Split-horizon
Add-paths
Receiving multiple paths per prefix from a BGP peer
Path selection with add-paths
BGP decision process with ADD-PATH
Advertising multiple paths using ADD-PATH
Limiting the number of paths per prefix
AIGP metric
Command interactions and dependencies
Changing the ASN
BGP advertisement
Changing the local ASN
Changing the router ID at the configuration level
Hold time and keep alive timer dependencies
Import and export route policies
Route damping and route policies
AS Override
Configuration guidelines for BGP
BGP configuration process overview
Configuration notes
General
BGP defaults
BGP MIB notes
Configuring BGP with CLI
BGP configuration overview
Preconfiguration requirements
BGP hierarchy
Internal and external BGP configurations
Basic BGP configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring a basic autonomous system
Creating an autonomous system
Configuring a router ID
BGP components
Configuring BGP
Configuring group attributes
Configuring neighbor attributes
Configuring AIGP
BGP configuration management tasks
Modifying an ASN
Modifying the BGP router ID
Modifying the router-level router ID
Deleting a neighbor
Deleting groups
Editing BGP parameters
BGP command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Global BGP commands
Group BGP commands
Neighbor BGP commands
Other BGP-related commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Other BGP-related commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Route policies
Configuring route policies
Policy statements
Default action behavior
Denied IP prefixes
Controlling route flapping
Regular expressions
BGP and OSPF route policy support
BGP route policies
Re-advertised route policies
When to use route policies
Route policy configuration process overview
Configuration notes
General
Configuring route policies with CLI
Route policy configuration overview
When to create routing policies
Default route policy actions
Policy evaluation
Damping
Basic configurations
Configuring route policy components
Beginning the policy statement
Creating a route policy
Configuring a default action
Configuring an entry
Configuring damping
Configuring a prefix list
Route policy configuration management tasks
Editing policy statements and parameters
Deleting an entry
Deleting a policy statement
Use of route policies for IGMP filtering
Route policy command reference
Command hierarchies
Route policy configuration commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Generic commands
Route policy options
Route policy damping commands
Route policy prefix commands
Route policy entry match commands
Route policy action commands
Show commands
Standards and protocol support
Customer Documentation and Product Support
Legal notice
Getting started
About this guide
Document structure and content
7210 SAS modes of operation
7210 SAS port modes
7210 SAS router configuration process
Conventions
Precautionary and information messages
Options or substeps in procedures and sequential workflows
Multicast
Overview of multicast
Multicast models (SSM)
SSM
Multicast features
IGMP
IGMP versions and interoperability requirements
IGMP version transition
SSM groups
PIM-SM
PIM-SM functions
Phase one
Phase two
Phase three
Encapsulating data packets in the register tunnel
PIM bootstrap router mechanism
PIM-SM routing policies
Reverse Path Forwarding checks
Anycast RP for PIM-SM
Implementation
Distributing PIM joins over multiple ECMP paths
MSDP
Anycast RPs for MSDP
MSDP procedure
MSDP peering scenarios
MSDP peer groups
MSDP mesh groups
MSDP routing policies
Draft-Rosen multicast in VPNs
Dynamic multicast signaling over P2MP LDP
Multicast debugging tools
Mtrace
Finding the last hop router
Directing the response
Mrinfo
Configuration guidelines for 7210 SAS
Configuring multicast parameters with CLI
Multicast configuration overview
Basic configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring IGMP parameters
Enabling IGMP
Configuring an IGMP interface
Configuring static parameters
Configuring SSM translation
Configuring PIM parameters
Enabling PIM
Configuring PIM interface parameters
Importing PIM join or register policies
Configuring MSDP parameters
Disabling IGMP or PIM
Disabling MSDP
Multicast command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
IGMP commands
PIM commands
MSDP commands
Operational commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Multicast commands
Router IGMP commands
Router PIM commands
MSDP commands
Operational commands
Show commands
IGMP commands
Router PIM commands
MSDP commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Debug IGMP commands
Debug PIM commands
Debug MSDP commands
RIP
RIP overview
RIP features
RIP version types
RIPv2 authentication
Metrics
Timers
Import and export policies
RIP packet format
RIPv1 format
RIPv2 format
Hierarchical levels
RIP configuration process overview
Configuration notes
General
Configuring RIP with CLI
RIP configuration overview
Preconfiguration requirements
RIP hierarchy
Basic RIP configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring interfaces
Configuring a route policy
Configuring RIP parameters
Configuring global-level parameters
Configuring group-level parameters
Configuring neighbor-level parameters
RIP configuration management tasks
Modifying RIP parameters
Deleting a group
Deleting a neighbor
RIP command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Group commands
Neighbor commands
Show RIP commands
Clear RIP commands
Debug RIP commands
Command descriptions
RIP configuration commands
Generic commands
RIP commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug RIP commands
OSPF
Configuring OSPF
OSPF areas
Backbone area
Stub area
Not-So-Stubby Area
OSPF super backbone
Sham links
Implementing the OSPF super backbone
Loop avoidance
DN-BIT
Route tag
Sham links
OSPFv3 authentication
Virtual links
Neighbors and adjacencies
Link-state advertisements
Metrics
Authentication
Multiple OSPF instances
Route export policies for OSPF
Preventing route redistribution loops
IP subnets
Preconfiguration recommendations
IP Fast-Reroute (IP FRR) for OSPF and IS-IS prefixes
LFA configuration
Reducing the scope of the LFA calculation by SPF
ECMP considerations
OSPF and IS-IS support for Loop-Free Alternate calculation
Loop-Free Alternate Shortest Path First (LFA SPF) policies
Configuration of route next-hop policy template
Configuring affinity or admin group constraint in route next-hop policy
Configuring SRLG group constraint in route next-hop policy
Interaction of IP and MPLS admin group and SRLG
Configuring protection type and next-hop type preference in route next-hop policy template
Application of route next-hop policy template to an interface
Excluding prefixes from LFA SPF
Modification to LFA next-hop selection algorithm
Segment routing in Shortest Path Forwarding
LFA protection using segment routing backup node SID
Detailed operation of LFA protection using backup node SID
Duplicate SID handling
OSPF control plane extensions
OSPF configuration process overview
Configuration notes
General
OSPF defaults
Configuring OSPF with CLI
OSPF configuration guidelines
Basic OSPF configuration
Configuring the router ID
Configuring OSPF components
Configuring OSPF parameters
Configuring an OSPF area
Configuring a stub area
Configuring a Not-So-Stubby Area
Configuring a virtual link
Configuring an interface
Configuring authentication
Assigning a designated router
Configuring route summaries
Configuring route preferences
OSPF configuration management tasks
Modifying a router ID
Deleting a router ID
Modifying OSPF parameters
OSPF command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands for OSPF
Configuration commands for OSPF3
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
OSPF global commands
OSPF area commands
Interface and virtual link commands
Show commands
Clear commands
OSPF debug commands
IS-IS
Configuring IS-IS
Routing
IS-IS frequently used terms
ISO network addressing
IS-IS PDU configuration
IS-IS operations
IS-IS route summarization
IS-IS multi-topology for IPv6
IS-IS administrative tags
Setting route tags
Using route tags
Segment routing in Shortest Path Forwarding
Segment routing operational procedures
Prefix advertisement and resolution
Error and resource exhaustion handling
Procedure 1: Providing support of multiple topologies for the same destination prefix
Procedure 2: Resolving received SID indexes or labels to different routes of the same prefix within the same IGP instance
Procedure 3: Checking for SID error before programming ILM and NHLFE
Procedure 4: Programming ILM/NHLFE for duplicate prefix-SID indexes/labels for different prefixes
Procedure 5: Programming ILM/NHLFE for the same prefix across IGP instances
Procedure 6: Handling ILM resource exhaustion while assigning an SID index/label
Procedure 7: Handling ILM/NHLFE/other IOM or CPM resource exhaustion while resolving or programming an SID index/label
Segment routing tunnel management
Tunnel MTU determination
Remote LFA with segment routing
Datapath support
Hash label
Control protocol changes
IS-IS control protocol changes
OSPF control protocol changes
BGP label route resolution using segment routing tunnels
Service packet forwarding with segment routing
Mirror services
IGP-LDP synchronization
IS-IS import policy on the 7210 SAS-Mxp
IS-IS configuration process overview
Configuration notes
Configuring IS-IS with CLI
IS-IS configuration overview
Router levels
Area address attributes
Interface level capability
Route leaking
Basic IS-IS configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring IS-IS components
Enabling IS-IS
Modifying router-level parameters
Configuring ISO area addresses
Configuring global IS-IS parameters
Configuring interface parameters
Example: configuring a Level 1 area
Example: modifying a router level capability
IS-IS configuration management tasks
Disabling IS-IS
Removing IS-IS
Modifying global IS-IS parameters
Modifying IS-IS interface parameters
Configuring leaking
Redistributing external IS-IS routers
IS-IS command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Global commands
Interface commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
IS-IS configuration commands
Generic commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
BGP
BGP overview
BGP communication
Message types
Group configuration and peers
Hierarchical levels
Route reflection
Fast external failover
Sending of BGP communities
ECMP and BGP route tunnels
Next-hop resolution of BGP labeled routes to tunnels
VPN-IPv4 and VPN-IPv6 route resolution
Route selection criteria
Enabling best external
BGP decision process with best external
Advertisement rules with best external
Displaying best-external routes
BGP path attributes
NEXT_HOP attribute
Next-hop indirection
BGP Routing Information Base
LOC-RIB features
BGP fast reroute
Calculating backup paths
Failure detection and switchover to the backup path
BGP fast reroute in a VPRN
BGP fast reroute in a VPRN configuration
RIB-OUT features
BGP export policies
Outbound Route Filtering
RT constrained route distribution
Minimum Route Advertisement Interval
Advertise-inactive
Split-horizon
Add-paths
Receiving multiple paths per prefix from a BGP peer
Path selection with add-paths
BGP decision process with ADD-PATH
Advertising multiple paths using ADD-PATH
Limiting the number of paths per prefix
AIGP metric
Command interactions and dependencies
Changing the ASN
BGP advertisement
Changing the local ASN
Changing the router ID at the configuration level
Hold time and keep alive timer dependencies
Import and export route policies
Route damping and route policies
AS Override
Configuration guidelines for BGP
BGP configuration process overview
Configuration notes
General
BGP defaults
BGP MIB notes
Configuring BGP with CLI
BGP configuration overview
Preconfiguration requirements
BGP hierarchy
Internal and external BGP configurations
Basic BGP configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring a basic autonomous system
Creating an autonomous system
Configuring a router ID
BGP components
Configuring BGP
Configuring group attributes
Configuring neighbor attributes
Configuring AIGP
BGP configuration management tasks
Modifying an ASN
Modifying the BGP router ID
Modifying the router-level router ID
Deleting a neighbor
Deleting groups
Editing BGP parameters
BGP command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Global BGP commands
Group BGP commands
Neighbor BGP commands
Other BGP-related commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Other BGP-related commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Route policies
Configuring route policies
Policy statements
Default action behavior
Denied IP prefixes
Controlling route flapping
Regular expressions
BGP and OSPF route policy support
BGP route policies
Re-advertised route policies
When to use route policies
Route policy configuration process overview
Configuration notes
General
Configuring route policies with CLI
Route policy configuration overview
When to create routing policies
Default route policy actions
Policy evaluation
Damping
Basic configurations
Configuring route policy components
Beginning the policy statement
Creating a route policy
Configuring a default action
Configuring an entry
Configuring damping
Configuring a prefix list
Route policy configuration management tasks
Editing policy statements and parameters
Deleting an entry
Deleting a policy statement
Use of route policies for IGMP filtering
Route policy command reference
Command hierarchies
Route policy configuration commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Generic commands
Route policy options
Route policy damping commands
Route policy prefix commands
Route policy entry match commands
Route policy action commands
Show commands
Standards and protocol support
Customer Documentation and Product Support
7210 SAS-D, Dxp, K 2F1C2T, K 2F6C4T, K 3SFP+ 8C Services Guide Release 22.9.R1
Legal notice
Getting started
About this guide
Document structure and content
7210 SAS modes of operation
7210 SAS port modes
7210 SAS services configuration process
Services overview
Introduction
Service types on 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, and 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
Service types on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Service policies on 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
Service policies on 77210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Nokia service model on 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, and 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
Nokia service model on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Service entities on 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, and 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
Service entities on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Customers
SAPs on 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, and 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
SAPs on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
SAP encapsulation types and identifiers
Ethernet encapsulations supported on 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Services and SAP encapsulations
Default SAPs on a dot1q port
Default SAPs on a QinQ port
Configuration notes for default QinQ SAPs for transit service in a ring deployment
SAP configuration considerations applicable for SAPs configured on access-uplink ports
Configuration guidelines for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
Configuration guidelines for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
SDPs on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
SDP binding
Spoke and mesh SDPs
SDP using BGP route tunnel
SDP keepalives
SDP administrative groups
Mixed-LSP mode of operation
G.8032/Ethernet ring protection switching
Overview of G.8032 operation
G.8032 Ethernet ring sub-rings
G.8032 virtual and non-virtual channel
G.8032 Ethernet ring sub-ring using non-virtual link
G.8032 OAM considerations
G.8032 QoS considerations
G.8032 service and solution combinations
G.8032 configuration guidelines
Layer 2 control processing
Service creation process overview
Deploying and provisioning services
Phase 1: core network construction
Phase 2: service administration
Phase 3: service provisioning
Configuration notes
General
Configuring global service entities with CLI
Service model entities
Basic configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring customer accounts
Customer information
Service creation process overview on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Deploying and provisioning services on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Phase 1: core network construction
Phase 2: service administration
Phase 3: service provisioning
Configuration notes
General
Configuring global service entities with CLI
Service model entities
Basic configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring customer accounts
Customer information
Configuring an SDP
SDP configuration tasks
Configuring an SDP
Configuring a Mixed-LSP SDP
ETH-CFM
Common actionable failures
MEP and MIP support
Configuring ETH-CFM parameters
Service management tasks
Modifying customer accounts
Deleting customers
Global services command reference
Command hierarchies
Customer commands
Pseudowire (PW) commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Pseudowire (PW) routing commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
SDP commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
SAP commands for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
SAP commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
SAP commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
ETH-CFM configuration commands
Show commands
Tools perform commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Command descriptions
Global service configuration commands
Generic commands
Customer management commands
Pseudowire commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
SDP commands
SDP keepalive commands
Tools perform commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Show, clear, debug commands
Services show commands
ETH-CFM show commands
VLL services
Epipe
Epipe service overview
Epipe oper state decoupling on 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Dynamic Multi-Segment Pseudowire routing
MS-PW routing — pseudowire routing
MS-PW routing — static routing
MS-PW routing — explicit paths
MS-PW routing — configuring VLLs using dynamic MS-PWs
MS-PW routing — active/passive T-PE selection
MS-PW routing — automatic endpoint configuration
MS-PW routing — selecting a path for an MS-PW
MS-PW routing — pseudowire templates
MS-PW routing — pseudowire redundancy
MS-PW routing — VCCV OAM for dynamic MS-PWs
MS-PW routing — VCCV-ping on dynamic MS-PWs
MS-PW routing — VCCV-trace on dynamic MS-PWs
MS-PW routing — example dynamic MS-PW configuration
Master-slave operation
PW redundancy — operation of master-slave pseudowire redundancy with existing scenarios
PW redundancy — VLL resilience
VLL resilience for a switched pseudowire path
PW redundancy — VLL resilience for a switched PW path
Access node resilience using MC-LAG and pseudowire redundancy
VLAN range for SAPs (or dot1q range SAPs) in an Epipe service
Processing behavior for dot1q range SAPs in access-uplink mode on 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, and 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
VLAN range SAPs feature support and restrictions
Processing behavior for dot1q range SAPs on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
VLAN range SAPs feature support and restrictions on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Epipe pseudowire switching on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Pseudowire switching with protection
Pseudowire switching behavior
Pseudowire switching TLV
Pseudowire switching point sub-TLVs
Pseudowire redundancy
VLL service resilience with pseudowire on 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
VLL resilience with two destination PE nodes
Master-slave operation
Operation of master-slave pseudowire redundancy with existing scenarios
VLL resilience for a switched pseudowire path
Pseudowire redundancy service models
Pseudowire redundancy — redundant VLL service model
Pseudowire redundancy — T-LDP status notification handling rules
Processing endpoint SAP active/standby status bits
Processing and merging
MPLS entropy label and hash label
VLL service considerations
SDPs
SAP encapsulations
QoS policies
Filter policies
MAC resources
Configuring a VLL service with CLI
Basic configurations
Common configuration tasks
Creating an Epipe service for 7210 SAS-D
Creating an Epipe service for 7210 SAS-Dxp
Creating an Epipe service with range SAPs
Creating an Epipe service for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
Creating an Epipe service for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T with range SAPs
Configuring Epipe SAP parameters
Local Epipe SAPs
Distributed Epipe service
Configuring SDP bindings
Using spoke-SDP control words
Configuring ingress and egress SAP parameters
Configuring VLL resilience
Configuring VLL resilience for a switched pseudowire path
Configuring default QinQ SAPs for Epipe transit traffic in a ring scenario in access-uplink mode
Service management tasks
Modifying Epipe service parameters
Disabling an Epipe service
Re-enabling an Epipe service
Deleting an Epipe service
VLL services command reference
Command hierarchy
Epipe service configuration commands
Epipe global commands for 7210 SAS-D
Epipe global commands for 7210 SAS-Dxp
Epipe global commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
Epipe global commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Epipe SAP configuration commands
Epipe SAP meter override commands
Epipe SAP statistics commands for 7210 SAS-D
Epipe SAP statistics commands for 7210 SAS-Dxp
Epipe spoke-SDP configuration commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Epipe SAP configuration — QoS and filter commands for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
Epipe SAP configuration — QoS and filter commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Connection profile commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Command descriptions
VLL service configuration commands
Generic commands
VLL global commands
VLL SAP commands
Connection profile commands
Service QoS and filter policy commands
Spoke-SDP commands
Ethernet Virtual Private Networks
EVPN applications
EVPN for MPLS tunnels in E-LAN services
EVPN for MPLS tunnels
BGP-EVPN control plane for MPLS tunnels
EVPN route type 3 — inclusive multicast Ethernet tag route
EVPN route type 2 — MAC/IP advertisement route
EVPN route type 1 — Ethernet Auto-Discovery route
EVPN route type 4 — ES route
BGP tunnel encapsulation extended community
EVPN for MPLS tunnels in VPLS services
EVPN and VPLS integration
Auto-derived RD in services with multiple BGP families
EVPN multi-homing in VPLS services
EVPN all-active multi-homing
All-active multi-homing procedures
Designated Forwarder election
Split-horizon
Aliasing
All-active multi-homing service model
ES discovery and DF election procedures
Step 1 — ES advertisement and discovery
Step 2 — DF election
Step 3 — DF and non-DF service behavior
Aliasing
Network failures and convergence for all-active multi-homing
Logical failures on ESs and black holes
Transient issues due to MAC route delays
EVPN single-active multi-homing
Single-active multi-homing service model
ES and DF election procedures
Backup PE function
Network failures and convergence for single-active multi-homing
General EVPN topics
ARP and ND snooping and proxy support
Proxy-ARP/ND periodic refresh, unsolicited refresh, and confirm-messages
Proxy-ND and the Router flag in neighbor advertisement messages
Procedure to add the R flag to a specified entry
BGP-EVPN MAC mobility
BGP-EVPN MAC duplication
Conditional static MAC and protection
BGP and EVPN route selection for EVPN routes
EVPN interaction with other features
EVPN-MPLS with existing VPLS features
EVPN with G.8032 in an access ring
Routing policies for BGP EVPN routes
Configuring an EVPN service with CLI
EVPN-MPLS configuration examples
EVPN all-active multi-homing example
EVPN single-active multi-homing example
EVPN command reference
Command hierarchies
EVPN configuration commands
EVPN show commands
EVPN clear commands
EVPN tools commands
Command descriptions
EVPN configuration commands
EVPN show commands
EVPN clear commands
Tools commands
Virtual Private LAN Service
VPLS service overview
VPLS packet walk-through for a local service
VPLS packet walk-through for a distributed service
VPLS features
VPLS enhancements on 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, and 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
VPLS enhancements on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
VPLS over MPLS - supported on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
VPLS over SAPs
VPLS MAC learning and packet forwarding
IGMP snooping on 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, and 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
IGMP snooping on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) support
Configuration guidelines for MVR
DHCPv4 snooping
L2 forwarding table management
FIB size on 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, and 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
FIB size on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
FIB size alarms
Local aging timers on 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, and 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
Local and remote aging timers on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Disable MAC aging
Disable MAC learning
Unknown MAC discard
VPLS and rate limiting
MAC move
Split horizon SAP groups
Split horizon SAP groups and split horizon spoke-SDP groups on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
VPLS and Spanning Tree Protocol
Spanning tree operating modes
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
Redundancy access to VPLS
MSTP for QinQ SAPs
MSTP general principles
MSTP in the 7210 SAS platform
Enhancements to the Spanning Tree Protocol in MPLS-based VPLS service (7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C Only)
L2PT termination
BPDU translation
L2PT and BPDU translation
VPLS access redundancy
STP-based redundant access to VPLS
VPLS redundancy on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C using MPLS uplinks
Spoke-SDP redundancy on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Spoke-SDP-based redundant access on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Inter-domain VPLS resiliency using multi-chassis endpoints on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
VPLS access redundancy when using MPLS uplinks on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
STP-based redundant access to VPLS using PWs on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Redundant access to VPLS without STP and using MPLS uplinks on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
MAC flush message processing in VPLS services with MPLS uplinks on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Dual homing to a VPLS service on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
VPLS service considerations
SAP encapsulations
VLAN processing
BGP-AD VPLS
BGP-AD and Target LDP (T-LDP) interaction on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
BGP-AD VPLS - SDP usage
BGP-AD VPLS - automatic creation of SDPs
BGP-AD VPLS - manually provisioned SDP
BGP-AD VPLS - automatic instantiation of pseudowires (SDP bindings)
BGP-AD VPLS - mixing statically configured and auto-discovered pseudowires in a VPLS service
BGP-AD VPLS - resiliency schemes
Routed VPLS
IES IP interface binding
Assigning a service name to a VPLS service
Service binding requirements
Bound service name assignment
Binding a service name to an IP interface
IP interface attached VPLS service constraints
IP interface and VPLS operational state coordination
IP interface MTU and fragmentation on 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
IP interface MTU and fragmentation on 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8CC
ARP and VPLS FIB interactions
Specific ARP cache behavior
The allow-ip-int-binding VPLS flag
SAPs only supported on standard Ethernet ports
LAG port membership constraints
VPLS feature support and restrictions
VPLS SAP ingress IP filter override on 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
QoS support for VPLS SAPs and IP interface
Routing related protocols on 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Spanning Tree and split horizon
R-VPLS support and caveats
Epipe emulation using dot1q VLAN range SAP in VPLS with G.8032
Epipe emulation using dot1q VLAN range SAP in VPLS with G.8032 — configuration guidelines and restrictions
Configuring a VPLS service with CLI
Basic configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring VPLS components
Creating a VPLS service
Enabling MAC move
Configuring STP bridge parameters in a VPLS
Bridge STP admin state
Mode
Bridge priority
Max age
Forward delay
Hello time
Hold count
MST instances
MST max hops
MST name
MST revision
Configuring a VPLS SAP
Local VPLS SAPs
Distributed VPLS service with SAPs (on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C)
Configuring default QinQ SAPs to pass all traffic from access to access-uplink port without any tag modifications
Configuring SAP-specific STP parameters
SAP STP administrative state
SAP virtual port number
SAP priority
SAP path cost
SAP edge port
SAP auto edge
SAP link type
MST instances
STP SAP operational states
Operationally disabled
Operationally discarding
Operationally learning
Operationally forwarding
SAP BPDU encapsulation state
Configuring VPLS SAPs with per-service split horizon
Configuring SDP bindings
Configuring VPLS spoke-SDPs with split horizon
Configuring VPLS redundancy
Creating a management VPLS for SAP protection
Configuring load balancing with management VPLS
Configuring a BGP Auto-Discovery on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Configuration steps
BGP- AD- LDP signaling
BGP AD- pseudowire template
Configuring a VPLS management interface
Creating a management VPLS for SAP protection using MPLS uplinks
Creating a management VPLS for spoke-SDP protection, using MPLS uplinks (7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C)
Configuring load balancing with management VPLS using MPLS uplinks (7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C)
Configuring selective MAC Flush, when using MPLS uplinks (7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C)
Configuring AS pseudowire in VPLS when using MPLS uplinks (7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C)
Service management tasks
Modifying VPLS service parameters
Modifying management VPLS parameters
Deleting a management VPLS
Disabling a management VPLS
Deleting a VPLS service
Disabling a VPLS service
Re-enabling a VPLS service
VPLS services command reference
Command hierarchies
VPLS service configuration commands
Global commands for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
Global commands for 7210 SAS-Dxp
Global commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
VPLS service xSTP commands
VPLS service SAP xSTP commands
VPLS service SAP DHCP snooping commands
SAP commands
VPLS SAP QoS and filter commands for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
VPLS SAP QoS and filter commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
VPLS service SAP IGMP snooping and MVR commands
VPLS SAP meter override commands
VPLS SAP statistics commands for 7210 SAS-D
VPLS mesh SDP commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
VPLS spoke-SDP commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Routed VPLS commands for 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
VPLS service configuration commands
Generic commands
DHCP commands
VPLS service commands
VPLS STP commands
VPLS SAP commands
ETH-CFM service commands
VPLS commands
VPLS filter and QoS policy commands
VPLS SDP commands
IGMP snooping commands
VPLS show commands
IGMP snooping show commands
VPLS clear commands
VPLS debug commands
Internet Enhanced Service on 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, and 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
IES service overview
IES features
IP interfaces
IPv6 support for IES IP interfaces associated with access-uplink SAPs (on 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp)
SAPs
Encapsulations
CPE connectivity check
QoS policies
CPU QoS for IES interfaces in access-uplink mode
Filter policies
Configuring an IES service with CLI
Basic configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring IES components
Configuring an IES service
Configuring IES interface parameters
Configuring IES SAP parameters
Configuring SAP parameters
Service management tasks
Modifying IES service parameters
Deleting an IES service
Disabling an IES service
Re-enabling an IES service
IES services command reference
Command hierarchies
Global IES commands for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
IES interface commands
IES interface routed VPLS commands for 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, and 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
IES interface SAP commands for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
IES interface SAP statistics commands for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
IES interface SAP QoS and filter commands for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
IES interface IPv6 commands (applicable only to access-uplink SAPs on 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp)
Show commands
Command descriptions
IES service configuration commands
Generic commands
IES global commands
IES interface IPv6 commands
IES interface commands
IES interface DHCP commands
IES interface ICMP commands
IES interface SAP commands
IES filter and QoS commands
IES interface SAP Statistics commands
Internet Enhanced Service on the 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
IES service overview
IES features
IP interfaces
SAPs
IPv6 support for IES IP interfaces
Encapsulations
Routing protocols
CPE connectivity check
QoS policies
CPU QoS for IES access interfaces in network mode
Filter policies
VRRP support for IES IP interfaces in network mode
Configuring an IES service with CLI
Basic configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring IES components
Configuring an IES service
Configuring IES interface parameters
Configuring IES SAP parameters
Configuring VRRP
Service management tasks
Modifying IES service parameters
Deleting an IES service
Disabling an IES service
Re-enabling an IES service
IES services command reference for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Command hierarchies
Global commands
Interface commands
VRRP commands (applicable only for network mode)
Routed VPLS commands
IES SAP configuration — QoS and filter commands
Interface IPv6 commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
IES service configuration commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Generic commands
IES global commands
IES interface commands
IES interface ICMP commands
IES SAP commands
IES filter commands
DHCP server commands
IES interface VRRP commands
IES interface IPv6 commands
IES show commands
Virtual Private Network service on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
VPRN service overview
Routing prerequisites
BGP support
Route distinguisher
Route reflector
CE to PE route exchange
Route redistribution
CPE connectivity check
Constrained route distribution
Constrained VPN route distribution based on route targets
Configuring the route target address family
Originating RT constraint routes
Receiving and re-advertising RT constraint routes
Using RT constraint routes
VPRN features
IP interfaces
SAPs
IPv6 support for VPRN IP interfaces (6VPE) in network mode
Encapsulations
QoS policies for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Filter policies
CPU QoS for VPRN interfaces
CE to PE routing protocols
PE to PE tunneling mechanisms
Per VRF route limiting
Spoke-SDP termination
Using OSPF in IP-VPNs
Service label mode of a VPRN
Inter-AS VPRNs
VRRP support for VPRN IP interfaces in network mode
Configuring a VPRN service with CLI
Basic configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring VPRN components
Creating a VPRN service
Configuring global VPRN parameters
Configuring router interfaces
Configuring VPRN protocols - BGP
Configuring VPRN BGP group and neighbor parameters
Configuring a VPRN interface
Configuring a VPRN interface SAP
Configuring VRRP
Configuring IPv6 parameters for VPRN BGP
Configuring VPRN IPv6 neighbor discovery parameters
Configuring OSPF for VPRN
Service management tasks
Modifying VPRN service parameters
Deleting a VPRN service
Disabling a VPRN service
Re-enabling a VPRN service
VPRN services command reference for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Command hierarchies
VPRN service configuration commands
DHCP server commands
IPoE commands
Interface commands
IPv6 interface commands (supported only on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C)
IPv6 router advertisement commands (supported only on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C)
Interface VRRP commands (for network mode only)
Routed VPLS commands for VPRN service
Interface SAP commands
BGP configuration commands
OSPF configuration commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
VPRN service configuration commands
Generic commands
Global commands
Router DHCP configuration commands
IPOE commands
SDP commands
Interface commands
VPRN IPv6 interface commands
IPv6 router advertisement commands
DHCP server commands
Interface ICMP commands
Interface SAP commands
Interface SAP filter and QoS policy commands
Interface VRRP commands
VPRN interface IPv6 commands
BGP commands
OSPF commands
VPRN show commands
VPRN clear commands
VPRN debug commands
Common CLI command descriptions
In this chapter
Common service commands
SAP syntax
Appendix: port-based split horizon
Overview
Topology
Configuration guidelines
Verification
Standards and protocol support
Customer Documentation and Product Support
Legal notice
Getting started
About this guide
Document structure and content
7210 SAS modes of operation
7210 SAS port modes
7210 SAS services configuration process
Services overview
Introduction
Service types on 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, and 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
Service types on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Service policies on 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
Service policies on 77210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Nokia service model on 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, and 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
Nokia service model on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Service entities on 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, and 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
Service entities on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Customers
SAPs on 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, and 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
SAPs on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
SAP encapsulation types and identifiers
Ethernet encapsulations supported on 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Services and SAP encapsulations
Default SAPs on a dot1q port
Default SAPs on a QinQ port
Configuration notes for default QinQ SAPs for transit service in a ring deployment
SAP configuration considerations applicable for SAPs configured on access-uplink ports
Configuration guidelines for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
Configuration guidelines for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
SDPs on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
SDP binding
Spoke and mesh SDPs
SDP using BGP route tunnel
SDP keepalives
SDP administrative groups
Mixed-LSP mode of operation
G.8032/Ethernet ring protection switching
Overview of G.8032 operation
G.8032 Ethernet ring sub-rings
G.8032 virtual and non-virtual channel
G.8032 Ethernet ring sub-ring using non-virtual link
G.8032 OAM considerations
G.8032 QoS considerations
G.8032 service and solution combinations
G.8032 configuration guidelines
Layer 2 control processing
Service creation process overview
Deploying and provisioning services
Phase 1: core network construction
Phase 2: service administration
Phase 3: service provisioning
Configuration notes
General
Configuring global service entities with CLI
Service model entities
Basic configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring customer accounts
Customer information
Service creation process overview on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Deploying and provisioning services on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Phase 1: core network construction
Phase 2: service administration
Phase 3: service provisioning
Configuration notes
General
Configuring global service entities with CLI
Service model entities
Basic configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring customer accounts
Customer information
Configuring an SDP
SDP configuration tasks
Configuring an SDP
Configuring a Mixed-LSP SDP
ETH-CFM
Common actionable failures
MEP and MIP support
Configuring ETH-CFM parameters
Service management tasks
Modifying customer accounts
Deleting customers
Global services command reference
Command hierarchies
Customer commands
Pseudowire (PW) commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Pseudowire (PW) routing commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
SDP commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
SAP commands for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
SAP commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
SAP commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
ETH-CFM configuration commands
Show commands
Tools perform commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Command descriptions
Global service configuration commands
Generic commands
Customer management commands
Pseudowire commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
SDP commands
SDP keepalive commands
Tools perform commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Show, clear, debug commands
Services show commands
ETH-CFM show commands
VLL services
Epipe
Epipe service overview
Epipe oper state decoupling on 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Dynamic Multi-Segment Pseudowire routing
MS-PW routing — pseudowire routing
MS-PW routing — static routing
MS-PW routing — explicit paths
MS-PW routing — configuring VLLs using dynamic MS-PWs
MS-PW routing — active/passive T-PE selection
MS-PW routing — automatic endpoint configuration
MS-PW routing — selecting a path for an MS-PW
MS-PW routing — pseudowire templates
MS-PW routing — pseudowire redundancy
MS-PW routing — VCCV OAM for dynamic MS-PWs
MS-PW routing — VCCV-ping on dynamic MS-PWs
MS-PW routing — VCCV-trace on dynamic MS-PWs
MS-PW routing — example dynamic MS-PW configuration
Master-slave operation
PW redundancy — operation of master-slave pseudowire redundancy with existing scenarios
PW redundancy — VLL resilience
VLL resilience for a switched pseudowire path
PW redundancy — VLL resilience for a switched PW path
Access node resilience using MC-LAG and pseudowire redundancy
VLAN range for SAPs (or dot1q range SAPs) in an Epipe service
Processing behavior for dot1q range SAPs in access-uplink mode on 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, and 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
VLAN range SAPs feature support and restrictions
Processing behavior for dot1q range SAPs on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
VLAN range SAPs feature support and restrictions on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Epipe pseudowire switching on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Pseudowire switching with protection
Pseudowire switching behavior
Pseudowire switching TLV
Pseudowire switching point sub-TLVs
Pseudowire redundancy
VLL service resilience with pseudowire on 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
VLL resilience with two destination PE nodes
Master-slave operation
Operation of master-slave pseudowire redundancy with existing scenarios
VLL resilience for a switched pseudowire path
Pseudowire redundancy service models
Pseudowire redundancy — redundant VLL service model
Pseudowire redundancy — T-LDP status notification handling rules
Processing endpoint SAP active/standby status bits
Processing and merging
MPLS entropy label and hash label
VLL service considerations
SDPs
SAP encapsulations
QoS policies
Filter policies
MAC resources
Configuring a VLL service with CLI
Basic configurations
Common configuration tasks
Creating an Epipe service for 7210 SAS-D
Creating an Epipe service for 7210 SAS-Dxp
Creating an Epipe service with range SAPs
Creating an Epipe service for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
Creating an Epipe service for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T with range SAPs
Configuring Epipe SAP parameters
Local Epipe SAPs
Distributed Epipe service
Configuring SDP bindings
Using spoke-SDP control words
Configuring ingress and egress SAP parameters
Configuring VLL resilience
Configuring VLL resilience for a switched pseudowire path
Configuring default QinQ SAPs for Epipe transit traffic in a ring scenario in access-uplink mode
Service management tasks
Modifying Epipe service parameters
Disabling an Epipe service
Re-enabling an Epipe service
Deleting an Epipe service
VLL services command reference
Command hierarchy
Epipe service configuration commands
Epipe global commands for 7210 SAS-D
Epipe global commands for 7210 SAS-Dxp
Epipe global commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
Epipe global commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Epipe SAP configuration commands
Epipe SAP meter override commands
Epipe SAP statistics commands for 7210 SAS-D
Epipe SAP statistics commands for 7210 SAS-Dxp
Epipe spoke-SDP configuration commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Epipe SAP configuration — QoS and filter commands for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
Epipe SAP configuration — QoS and filter commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Connection profile commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Command descriptions
VLL service configuration commands
Generic commands
VLL global commands
VLL SAP commands
Connection profile commands
Service QoS and filter policy commands
Spoke-SDP commands
Ethernet Virtual Private Networks
EVPN applications
EVPN for MPLS tunnels in E-LAN services
EVPN for MPLS tunnels
BGP-EVPN control plane for MPLS tunnels
EVPN route type 3 — inclusive multicast Ethernet tag route
EVPN route type 2 — MAC/IP advertisement route
EVPN route type 1 — Ethernet Auto-Discovery route
EVPN route type 4 — ES route
BGP tunnel encapsulation extended community
EVPN for MPLS tunnels in VPLS services
EVPN and VPLS integration
Auto-derived RD in services with multiple BGP families
EVPN multi-homing in VPLS services
EVPN all-active multi-homing
All-active multi-homing procedures
Designated Forwarder election
Split-horizon
Aliasing
All-active multi-homing service model
ES discovery and DF election procedures
Step 1 — ES advertisement and discovery
Step 2 — DF election
Step 3 — DF and non-DF service behavior
Aliasing
Network failures and convergence for all-active multi-homing
Logical failures on ESs and black holes
Transient issues due to MAC route delays
EVPN single-active multi-homing
Single-active multi-homing service model
ES and DF election procedures
Backup PE function
Network failures and convergence for single-active multi-homing
General EVPN topics
ARP and ND snooping and proxy support
Proxy-ARP/ND periodic refresh, unsolicited refresh, and confirm-messages
Proxy-ND and the Router flag in neighbor advertisement messages
Procedure to add the R flag to a specified entry
BGP-EVPN MAC mobility
BGP-EVPN MAC duplication
Conditional static MAC and protection
BGP and EVPN route selection for EVPN routes
EVPN interaction with other features
EVPN-MPLS with existing VPLS features
EVPN with G.8032 in an access ring
Routing policies for BGP EVPN routes
Configuring an EVPN service with CLI
EVPN-MPLS configuration examples
EVPN all-active multi-homing example
EVPN single-active multi-homing example
EVPN command reference
Command hierarchies
EVPN configuration commands
EVPN show commands
EVPN clear commands
EVPN tools commands
Command descriptions
EVPN configuration commands
EVPN show commands
EVPN clear commands
Tools commands
Virtual Private LAN Service
VPLS service overview
VPLS packet walk-through for a local service
VPLS packet walk-through for a distributed service
VPLS features
VPLS enhancements on 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, and 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
VPLS enhancements on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
VPLS over MPLS - supported on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
VPLS over SAPs
VPLS MAC learning and packet forwarding
IGMP snooping on 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, and 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
IGMP snooping on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) support
Configuration guidelines for MVR
DHCPv4 snooping
L2 forwarding table management
FIB size on 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, and 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
FIB size on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
FIB size alarms
Local aging timers on 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, and 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
Local and remote aging timers on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Disable MAC aging
Disable MAC learning
Unknown MAC discard
VPLS and rate limiting
MAC move
Split horizon SAP groups
Split horizon SAP groups and split horizon spoke-SDP groups on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
VPLS and Spanning Tree Protocol
Spanning tree operating modes
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
Redundancy access to VPLS
MSTP for QinQ SAPs
MSTP general principles
MSTP in the 7210 SAS platform
Enhancements to the Spanning Tree Protocol in MPLS-based VPLS service (7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C Only)
L2PT termination
BPDU translation
L2PT and BPDU translation
VPLS access redundancy
STP-based redundant access to VPLS
VPLS redundancy on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C using MPLS uplinks
Spoke-SDP redundancy on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Spoke-SDP-based redundant access on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Inter-domain VPLS resiliency using multi-chassis endpoints on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
VPLS access redundancy when using MPLS uplinks on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
STP-based redundant access to VPLS using PWs on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Redundant access to VPLS without STP and using MPLS uplinks on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
MAC flush message processing in VPLS services with MPLS uplinks on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Dual homing to a VPLS service on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
VPLS service considerations
SAP encapsulations
VLAN processing
BGP-AD VPLS
BGP-AD and Target LDP (T-LDP) interaction on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
BGP-AD VPLS - SDP usage
BGP-AD VPLS - automatic creation of SDPs
BGP-AD VPLS - manually provisioned SDP
BGP-AD VPLS - automatic instantiation of pseudowires (SDP bindings)
BGP-AD VPLS - mixing statically configured and auto-discovered pseudowires in a VPLS service
BGP-AD VPLS - resiliency schemes
Routed VPLS
IES IP interface binding
Assigning a service name to a VPLS service
Service binding requirements
Bound service name assignment
Binding a service name to an IP interface
IP interface attached VPLS service constraints
IP interface and VPLS operational state coordination
IP interface MTU and fragmentation on 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
IP interface MTU and fragmentation on 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8CC
ARP and VPLS FIB interactions
Specific ARP cache behavior
The allow-ip-int-binding VPLS flag
SAPs only supported on standard Ethernet ports
LAG port membership constraints
VPLS feature support and restrictions
VPLS SAP ingress IP filter override on 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
QoS support for VPLS SAPs and IP interface
Routing related protocols on 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Spanning Tree and split horizon
R-VPLS support and caveats
Epipe emulation using dot1q VLAN range SAP in VPLS with G.8032
Epipe emulation using dot1q VLAN range SAP in VPLS with G.8032 — configuration guidelines and restrictions
Configuring a VPLS service with CLI
Basic configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring VPLS components
Creating a VPLS service
Enabling MAC move
Configuring STP bridge parameters in a VPLS
Bridge STP admin state
Mode
Bridge priority
Max age
Forward delay
Hello time
Hold count
MST instances
MST max hops
MST name
MST revision
Configuring a VPLS SAP
Local VPLS SAPs
Distributed VPLS service with SAPs (on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C)
Configuring default QinQ SAPs to pass all traffic from access to access-uplink port without any tag modifications
Configuring SAP-specific STP parameters
SAP STP administrative state
SAP virtual port number
SAP priority
SAP path cost
SAP edge port
SAP auto edge
SAP link type
MST instances
STP SAP operational states
Operationally disabled
Operationally discarding
Operationally learning
Operationally forwarding
SAP BPDU encapsulation state
Configuring VPLS SAPs with per-service split horizon
Configuring SDP bindings
Configuring VPLS spoke-SDPs with split horizon
Configuring VPLS redundancy
Creating a management VPLS for SAP protection
Configuring load balancing with management VPLS
Configuring a BGP Auto-Discovery on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Configuration steps
BGP- AD- LDP signaling
BGP AD- pseudowire template
Configuring a VPLS management interface
Creating a management VPLS for SAP protection using MPLS uplinks
Creating a management VPLS for spoke-SDP protection, using MPLS uplinks (7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C)
Configuring load balancing with management VPLS using MPLS uplinks (7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C)
Configuring selective MAC Flush, when using MPLS uplinks (7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C)
Configuring AS pseudowire in VPLS when using MPLS uplinks (7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C)
Service management tasks
Modifying VPLS service parameters
Modifying management VPLS parameters
Deleting a management VPLS
Disabling a management VPLS
Deleting a VPLS service
Disabling a VPLS service
Re-enabling a VPLS service
VPLS services command reference
Command hierarchies
VPLS service configuration commands
Global commands for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
Global commands for 7210 SAS-Dxp
Global commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
VPLS service xSTP commands
VPLS service SAP xSTP commands
VPLS service SAP DHCP snooping commands
SAP commands
VPLS SAP QoS and filter commands for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
VPLS SAP QoS and filter commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T, and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
VPLS service SAP IGMP snooping and MVR commands
VPLS SAP meter override commands
VPLS SAP statistics commands for 7210 SAS-D
VPLS mesh SDP commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
VPLS spoke-SDP commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Routed VPLS commands for 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T, 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
VPLS service configuration commands
Generic commands
DHCP commands
VPLS service commands
VPLS STP commands
VPLS SAP commands
ETH-CFM service commands
VPLS commands
VPLS filter and QoS policy commands
VPLS SDP commands
IGMP snooping commands
VPLS show commands
IGMP snooping show commands
VPLS clear commands
VPLS debug commands
Internet Enhanced Service on 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, and 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
IES service overview
IES features
IP interfaces
IPv6 support for IES IP interfaces associated with access-uplink SAPs (on 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp)
SAPs
Encapsulations
CPE connectivity check
QoS policies
CPU QoS for IES interfaces in access-uplink mode
Filter policies
Configuring an IES service with CLI
Basic configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring IES components
Configuring an IES service
Configuring IES interface parameters
Configuring IES SAP parameters
Configuring SAP parameters
Service management tasks
Modifying IES service parameters
Deleting an IES service
Disabling an IES service
Re-enabling an IES service
IES services command reference
Command hierarchies
Global IES commands for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
IES interface commands
IES interface routed VPLS commands for 7210 SAS-D, 7210 SAS-Dxp, and 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
IES interface SAP commands for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
IES interface SAP statistics commands for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
IES interface SAP QoS and filter commands for 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp
IES interface IPv6 commands (applicable only to access-uplink SAPs on 7210 SAS-D and 7210 SAS-Dxp)
Show commands
Command descriptions
IES service configuration commands
Generic commands
IES global commands
IES interface IPv6 commands
IES interface commands
IES interface DHCP commands
IES interface ICMP commands
IES interface SAP commands
IES filter and QoS commands
IES interface SAP Statistics commands
Internet Enhanced Service on the 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
IES service overview
IES features
IP interfaces
SAPs
IPv6 support for IES IP interfaces
Encapsulations
Routing protocols
CPE connectivity check
QoS policies
CPU QoS for IES access interfaces in network mode
Filter policies
VRRP support for IES IP interfaces in network mode
Configuring an IES service with CLI
Basic configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring IES components
Configuring an IES service
Configuring IES interface parameters
Configuring IES SAP parameters
Configuring VRRP
Service management tasks
Modifying IES service parameters
Deleting an IES service
Disabling an IES service
Re-enabling an IES service
IES services command reference for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Command hierarchies
Global commands
Interface commands
VRRP commands (applicable only for network mode)
Routed VPLS commands
IES SAP configuration — QoS and filter commands
Interface IPv6 commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
IES service configuration commands for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Generic commands
IES global commands
IES interface commands
IES interface ICMP commands
IES SAP commands
IES filter commands
DHCP server commands
IES interface VRRP commands
IES interface IPv6 commands
IES show commands
Virtual Private Network service on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
VPRN service overview
Routing prerequisites
BGP support
Route distinguisher
Route reflector
CE to PE route exchange
Route redistribution
CPE connectivity check
Constrained route distribution
Constrained VPN route distribution based on route targets
Configuring the route target address family
Originating RT constraint routes
Receiving and re-advertising RT constraint routes
Using RT constraint routes
VPRN features
IP interfaces
SAPs
IPv6 support for VPRN IP interfaces (6VPE) in network mode
Encapsulations
QoS policies for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Filter policies
CPU QoS for VPRN interfaces
CE to PE routing protocols
PE to PE tunneling mechanisms
Per VRF route limiting
Spoke-SDP termination
Using OSPF in IP-VPNs
Service label mode of a VPRN
Inter-AS VPRNs
VRRP support for VPRN IP interfaces in network mode
Configuring a VPRN service with CLI
Basic configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring VPRN components
Creating a VPRN service
Configuring global VPRN parameters
Configuring router interfaces
Configuring VPRN protocols - BGP
Configuring VPRN BGP group and neighbor parameters
Configuring a VPRN interface
Configuring a VPRN interface SAP
Configuring VRRP
Configuring IPv6 parameters for VPRN BGP
Configuring VPRN IPv6 neighbor discovery parameters
Configuring OSPF for VPRN
Service management tasks
Modifying VPRN service parameters
Deleting a VPRN service
Disabling a VPRN service
Re-enabling a VPRN service
VPRN services command reference for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Command hierarchies
VPRN service configuration commands
DHCP server commands
IPoE commands
Interface commands
IPv6 interface commands (supported only on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C)
IPv6 router advertisement commands (supported only on 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T and 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C)
Interface VRRP commands (for network mode only)
Routed VPLS commands for VPRN service
Interface SAP commands
BGP configuration commands
OSPF configuration commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
VPRN service configuration commands
Generic commands
Global commands
Router DHCP configuration commands
IPOE commands
SDP commands
Interface commands
VPRN IPv6 interface commands
IPv6 router advertisement commands
DHCP server commands
Interface ICMP commands
Interface SAP commands
Interface SAP filter and QoS policy commands
Interface VRRP commands
VPRN interface IPv6 commands
BGP commands
OSPF commands
VPRN show commands
VPRN clear commands
VPRN debug commands
Common CLI command descriptions
In this chapter
Common service commands
SAP syntax
Appendix: port-based split horizon
Overview
Topology
Configuration guidelines
Verification
Standards and protocol support
Customer Documentation and Product Support
7210 SAS-Mxp, S, Sx, T Services Guide Release 22.9.R1
Legal notice
Getting started
About this guide
Document structure and content
7210 SAS modes of operation
7210 SAS port modes
7210 SAS services configuration process
Conventions
Precautionary and information messages
Options or substeps in procedures and sequential workflows
Services overview
Introduction
Service types
Service policies
Nokia service model
Service entities
Customers
SAPs
SAP encapsulation types and identifiers
Ethernet encapsulations
Services and SAP encapsulations
Default SAP on a dot1q port
Default SAPs on a QinQ port (supported only on 7210 SAS devices configured in access-uplink mode)
Configuration notes for use of default QinQ SAPs for transit service in a ring deployment
SAP configuration considerations for network mode and access-uplink mode
SAP configuration notes when operating 7210 SAS devices in network mode only
QinQ SAP Configuration Restrictions for 7210 SAS platforms in network operating mode
SAP configuration notes for 7210 SAS platforms in access-uplink operating mode
SDPs
SDP binding
Spoke and mesh SDPs
SDP using BGP route tunnel
SDP keepalives
Mixed-LSP mode of operation
SAP and service scaling with high SAP scale mode
Guidelines for configuring high SAP scale mode
Guidelines for configuring low SAP scale mode
G.8032 Ethernet ring protection switching
Overview of G.8032 operation
Ethernet ring sub-rings
Virtual and non-virtual channel
Ethernet ring sub-ring using non-virtual link
Lag support
OAM considerations
QoS considerations
Support service and solution combinations
Configuration guidelines for G.8032
Service creation process overview
Deploying and provisioning services
Phase 1: core network construction
Phase 2: service administration
Phase 3: service provisioning
Configuration notes
General
Configuring global service entities with CLI
Service model entities
Basic configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring customers accounts
Customer information
Configuring an SDP
SDP configuration tasks
Configuring an SDP
Configuring a mixed-LSP SDP
Ethernet connectivity fault management
MA, MEP, MIP, and MD levels
Common actionable failures
MEP and MIP support
Configuring ETH-CFM parameters
Applying ETH-CFM parameters
Layer 2 control processing
Service management tasks
Modifying customer accounts
Deleting customers
Modifying SDPs
Deleting SDPs
Global services command reference
Command hierarchies
Global service configuration commands
Customer commands
Pseudowire (PW) commands
SDP commands
SAP commands for 7210 SAS platforms operating in network mode
SAP commands for 7210 SAS platforms operating in access-uplink mode
ETH-CFM configuration commands
Show commands
Tools commands
Command descriptions
Global service configuration commands
Generic commands
Customer Management Commands
Pseudowire Commands
SDP commands
SDP keepalive commands
Show commands
Show service commands
Show ETH-CFM commands
Tools commands
Tools perform commands
VLL services
Epipe services
Epipe services overview
Epipe with PBB
Processing packets received with more than two tags on a QinQ SAP in Epipe service
Feature support, configuration notes, and restrictions
Configuration example of Epipe services for processing of packets received with more than two tags on a QinQ SAP
Epipe operational state decoupling
Pseudowire switching
Pseudowire switching with protection
Pseudowire switching behavior
Pseudowire switching TLV
Static-to-dynamic pseudowire switching
Pseudowire redundancy
VLL resilience with two destination PE nodes
Dynamic multi-segment pseudowire routing
Pseudowire routing
Static routing
Explicit paths
Configuring VLLs using dynamic MS-PW
Active/passive T-PE selection
Automatic endpoint configuration
Selecting a path for an MS-PW
Pseudowire templates
Pseudowire redundancy
VCCV OAM for dynamic MS-PWs
VCCV-Ping on dynamic MS-PWs
VCCV-Trace on dynamic MS-PWs
Example dynamic MS-PW configuration
Master-slave operation
Operation of master-slave pseudowire redundancy with existing scenarios
VLL resilience path
VLL resilience for a switched PW path
Access mode resilience Using MC-LAG and pseudowire redundancy
VLL resilience for a switched pseudowire path
Pseudowire redundancy service models
Redundant VLL service model
T-LDP status notification handling rules
Processing endpoint SAP active/standby status bits
Processing and merging
Epipe configuration for MPLS-TP
SDPs
VLL spoke-SDP configuration
Credit-based algorithm
VLAN range for SAPs in an Epipe service
Processing behavior for SAPs using VLAN ranges in access-uplink mode
VLAN range SAPs feature support and restrictions
Processing behavior for SAPs using VLAN ranges in network operating mode
VLL service considerations
SDPs
SAP encapsulations
QoS policies
Filter policies
MAC resources
Configuring a VLL service with CLI
Common configuration tasks
Configuring VLL components
Creating an Epipe service in network mode
Creating an Epipe service in access-uplink mode
Configuring Epipe SAP parameters
Epipe SAP
Local Epipe SAPs
Distributed Epipe Service
Configuring Ingress SAP Parameters
Creating an Epipe service for 7210 SAS-Mxp with range SAPs
Configuring default QinQ SAPs for Epipe transit traffic in a ring scenario in access-uplink mode
Configuring SDP bindings
Using spoke-SDP control words
Configuring VLL resilience
Configuring VLL resilience for a switched pseudowire path
Service management tasks
Modifying Epipe service parameters
Disabling an Epipe service
Re-enabling an Epipe service
Deleting an Epipe service
VLL services command reference
Command hierarchies
VLL service configuration commands
Epipe global commands (for access-uplink operating mode)
Epipe global commands (for network operating mode)
Epipe SAP configuration commands
Epipe SAP meter override commands
Epipe SAP statistics commands
Epipe spoke-SDP configuration commands
Epipe SAP QoS and filter commands (for 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE (standalone and standalone-VC), and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE (standalone) devices)
Epipe SAP QoS and filter commands (for 7210 SAS-Mxp)
Connection profile commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Command descriptions
VLL service configuration commands
Generic commands
VLL global commands
VLL SAP commands
Service filter and QoS policy commands
Epipe Service SAP Statistics Commands
VLL SDP Commands
Connection profile commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Ethernet Virtual Private Networks
EVPN applications
EVPN for MPLS tunnels in E-LAN services
EVPN for MPLS tunnels
BGP-EVPN control plane for MPLS tunnels
EVPN route type 3 — inclusive multicast Ethernet tag route
EVPN route type 2 — MAC/IP advertisement route
EVPN route type 1 — Ethernet Auto-Discovery route
EVPN route type 4 — ES route
BGP tunnel encapsulation extended community
EVPN for MPLS tunnels in VPLS services
EVPN and VPLS integration
Auto-Derived RD in services with multiple BGP families
EVPN multi-homing in VPLS services
EVPN all-active multi-homing
All-active multi-homing procedures
Designated Forwarder election
Split-horizon
Aliasing
All-active multi-homing service model
ES discovery and DF election procedures
Step 1 — ES advertisement and discovery
Step 2 — DF election
Step 3 — DF and non-DF service behavior
Aliasing
Network failures and convergence for all-active multi-homing
Logical failures on ESs and black holes
Transient issues due to MAC route delays
EVPN single-active multi-homing
Single-active multi-homing service model
ES and DF election procedures
Backup PE function
Network failures and convergence for single-active multi-homing
General EVPN topics
ARP and ND snooping and proxy support
Proxy-ARP/ND periodic refresh, unsolicited refresh, and confirm-messages
Proxy-ND and the Router flag in Neighbor Advertisement messages
Procedure to add the R Flag to a specified entry
Configuration guidelines for proxy-ARP and proxy-ND
Proxy-ARP and proxy-ND support for spoke-SDP bindings
BGP-EVPN MAC mobility
BGP-EVPN MAC duplication
Conditional static MAC and protection
BGP and EVPN route selection for EVPN routes
EVPN interaction with other features
EVPN-MPLS with existing VPLS features
EVPN with G.8032 in an access ring
Routing policies for BGP EVPN routes
Configuring an EVPN service with CLI
EVPN-MPLS configuration examples
EVPN single-active multi-homing example
EVPN command reference
Command hierarchies
EVPN configuration commands
EVPN show commands
EVPN clear commands
EVPN tools commands
Command descriptions
EVPN configuration commands
EVPN show commands
EVPN clear commands
Tools commands
Virtual Private LAN Service
VPLS service overview
VPLS packet walk-through in network mode
VPLS packet walk-through in access-uplink mode
VPLS features
VPLS enhancements
VPLS over MPLS in network operating mode
VPLS over QinQ spokes for 7210 SAS devices configured in access-uplink operating mode
VPLS MAC learning and packet forwarding
IGMP snooping in a VPLS service
Configuration guidelines for IGMP snooping in VPLS service
DHCPv4 snooping
DHCPv6 snooping
Client and network-facing service objects
Trusted and untrusted service objects
DHCPv6 relay agent options
DHCPv6 snooping QoS considerations
Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) support in VPLS service
Configuration guidelines for MVR in VPLS services
Layer 2 forwarding table management
FIB size
FIB size alarms
Local and remote aging timers
Disable MAC aging
Disable MAC learning
Unknown MAC discard
VPLS and rate limiting
MAC move
Split horizon SAP groups and split horizon spoke-SDP groups
Configuration guidelines for use of split horizon group in a VPLS service
VPLS and spanning tree protocol
Spanning tree operating modes
Multiple Spanning Tree
Redundancy access to VPLS
MSTP for QinQ SAPs
Provider MSTP
MSTP general principles
MSTP in the 7210 SAS platform
Enhancements to the Spanning Tree Protocol
L2PT termination
BPDU translation
L2PT and BPDU translation
VPLS redundancy
Spoke-SDP redundancy for metro interconnection
Spoke-SDP-based redundant access
Inter-domain VPLS resiliency using multi-chassis endpoints
VPLS access redundancy
STP-based redundant access to VPLS
Redundant access to VPLS without STP
MAC flush message processing
MAC Flush with STP
Selective MAC flush
Dual homing to a VPLS service
VPLS service considerations
SAP encapsulations
VLAN processing
BGP Auto-Discovery for LDP VPLS
BGP AD overview
Information model
FEC element for T-LDP signaling
BGP-AD and Target LDP (T-LDP) interaction
SDP usage
Automatic creation of SDPs
Manually provisioned SDP
Automatic instantiation of pseudowires (SDP bindings)
Mixing statically configured and auto-discovered pseudowires in a VPLS service
Resiliency schemes
Routed VPLS
IES or VPRN IP interface binding
Assigning a service name to a VPLS service
Service binding requirements
Bound Service Name Assignment
Binding a service name to an IP interface
IP interface attached VPLS service constraints
IP interface and VPLS operational state coordination
IP interface MTU and fragmentation
ARP and VPLS FIB interactions
R-VPLS specific ARP cache behavior
The allow-ip-int-binding VPLS flag
R-VPLS SAP support on standard Ethernet ports
LAG port membership constraints
VPLS feature support and restrictions
VPLS SAP ingress IP filter override
QoS support for VPLS SAPs and IP interface in a R-VPLS service
R-VPLS and routing protocols support
Spanning tree and split horizon
R-VPLS MAC ACLs
R-VPLS features supported with MAC ACLs
R-VPLS and IGMPv3 snooping
Configuration guidelines and restrictions for IGMP snooping in R-VPLS
R-VPLS supported functionality and restrictions
Epipe emulation using dot1q VLAN range SAP in VPLS with G.8032
Epipe emulation configuration guidelines and restrictions
Configuring a VPLS service with CLI
Basic configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring VPLS components
Creating a VPLS service
Enabling MAC move
Configuring STP bridge parameters in a VPLS
Bridge STP Admin State
Mode
Bridge Priority
Max Age
Forward Delay
Hello Time
Hold Count
MST Instances
MST Max Hops
MST Name
MST Revision
Configuring a VPLS SAP
Local VPLS SAPs
Distributed VPLS SAPs
Configuring default QinQ SAPs to pass all traffic from access to access-uplink Port without any tag modifications
Configuring SAP-specific STP parameters
SAP STP Administrative State
SAP Virtual Port Number
SAP Priority
SAP Path Cost
SAP Edge Port
SAP Auto Edge
SAP Link Type
MST Instances
STP SAP Operational States
Operationally Disabled
Operationally Discarding
Operationally Learning
Operationally Forwarding
SAP BPDU Encapsulation State
Configuring VPLS SAPs with per service split horizon
Configuring SDP bindings
Configuring VPLS spoke-SDPs with split horizon
Configuring VPLS redundancy
Creating a management VPLS for SAP protection
Creating a management VPLS for spoke-SDP protection
Configuring load Balancing with management VPLS
Configuring a BGP-auto-discovery
Configuring load balancing with management VPLS
Configuring selective MAC flush
Configuring load balancing with management VPLS
Configuring IGMPv3 snooping in RVPLS
Configuring BGP Auto-Discovery
Configuration steps
Configuring AS pseudowire in VPLS
Service management tasks
Modifying VPLS service parameters
Modifying management VPLS parameters
Deleting a management VPLS
Disabling a management VPLS
Deleting a VPLS service
Disabling a VPLS service
Re-enabling a VPLS service
VPLS services command reference
Command hierarchies
VPLS service configuration commands
Global commands
VPLS service xSTP commands
VPLS service SAP DHCP snooping commands
VPLS DHCPv6 snooping commands for SAP and SDP bindings
SAP commands
VPLS SAP QoS and filter commands (for 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE (standalone and standalone-VC), and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE)
VPLS SAP QoS and filter Commands (for 7210 SAS-Mxp)
VPLS service and SAP IGMP snooping and MVR commands
VPLS SAP meter override commands
VPLS service SAP xSTP commands
VPLS SAP statistics commands
Mesh SDP commands
Spoke-SDP commands
Routed VPLS commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
VPLS configuration commands
Generic commands
VPLS service commands
VPLS STP commands
VPLS SAP commands
VPLS service SAP DHCP snooping commands
VPLS DHCPv6 snooping commands for SAP and SDP bindings
ETH-CFM service commands
VPLS SAP statistics commands
VPLS filter and QoS policy commands
VPLS SDP commands
SAP IGMP-snooping commands
Routed VPLS commands
VPLS show commands
IGMP snooping show commands
VPLS clear commands
VPLS debug commands
IEEE 802.1ah Provider Backbone Bridging (PBB)
IEEE 802.1ah PBB overview
PBB features
Integrated PBB-VPLS solution
PBB technology
PBB mapping to existing VPLS configurations
SAP support
PBB B-VPLS
PBB I-VPLS
PBB packet walk-through
PBB ELINE service
PBB resiliency for PBB Epipe service
PBB resiliency for B-VPLS
Access multi-homing for native PBB (B-VPLS over SAP infrastructure)
PBB QoS
PBB ACL support
Configuration guidelines
Configuration guidelines for the 7210 SAS-T
Configuration examples
PBB ELAN and ELINE
MC-LAG multi-homing for native PBB
PBB command reference
Command hierarchies
PBB service commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
PBB service configuration commands
PBB show commands
PBB clear commands
PBB debug commands
Internet Enhanced Service
IES service overview
IES features
IP interfaces
IPv6 support for IES IP interfaces (access-uplink operating mode)
IPv6 support for IES IP interfaces (network operating mode)
Encapsulations
Routing protocols
CPE connectivity check
QoS policies
CPU QoS for IES interfaces in access-uplink mode
CPU QoS for IES access interfaces in network mode
Filter policies
VRRP support for IES IP interfaces in network operating mode
Configuring an IES service with CLI
Basic configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring IES Components
Configuring an IES service
Configuring IES interface parameters
Network mode
Access-uplink mode
Configuring IES SAP parameters
Configuring VRRP
Service management tasks
Modifying IES service parameters
Deleting an IES service
Disabling an IES service
Re-enabling an IES service
IES services command reference
Command hierarchies
IES configuration commands
Global commands
Interface commands (network operating mode)
Interface commands (access-uplink operating mode)
RVPLS commands (network operating mode)
RVPLS commands (access-uplink operating mode)
Interface SAP commands (network and access-uplink operating mode)
IES SAP QoS and filter commands (for 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE, and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE)
IES SAP QoS and filter commands (for 7210 SAS-Mxp)
VRRP commands
Interface IPv6 commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
IES service configuration commands
Generic commands
IES global commands
IES interface IPv6 commands
IES interface commands
Interface VRRP commands
IES interface ICMP commands
IES SAP commands
IES QoS and filter commands
IES interface SAP statistics commands
Show commands
Virtual Private Routed Network service
VPRN service overview
Routing prerequisites
BGP support
Route distinguishers
Route reflector
Customer Edge to Provider Edge route exchange
Route redistribution
CPE connectivity check
Constrained Route Distribution
Constrained VPN route distribution based on route targets
Configuring the route target address family
Originating RT constraint routes
Receiving and re-advertising RT constraint routes
Using RT constraint routes
BGP fast reroute in a VPRN
BGP fast reroute in a VPRN configuration
VPRN features
IP interfaces
DHCP and DHCPv6
DHCP relay and DHCPv6 relay
DHCP relay
DHCP options
DHCPv6 Relay
DHCPv6 options
SAPs
IPv6 support for VPRN IP interfaces
Encapsulations
QoS policies
Filter policies
CPU QoS for VPRN interfaces
CE to PE routing protocols
PE to PE tunneling mechanisms
Per-VRF route limiting
Exporting MP-BGP VPN routes
Configuration guidelines
Spoke-SDPs
Using OSPF in IP-VPNs
Service label mode of a VPRN
Multicast in IP-VPN applications
Multicast protocols supported in the provider network
MVPN Using BGP control plane
MVPN membership auto-discovery using BGP
Provider tunnel support
Inter-AS VPRNs
Configuring a VPRN service with CLI
Basic configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring VPRN components
Creating a VPRN service
Configuring global VPRN parameters
Configuring Router Interfaces
Configuring VPRN protocols - BGP
Configuring VPRN BGP group and neighbor parameters
VPRN BGP CLI syntax
Configuring a VPRN interface
Configuring a VPRN interface SAP
Configuring VPRN protocols - OSPF
VPRN OSPF CLI syntax
Service management tasks
Modifying VPRN service parameters
Deleting a VPRN service
Disabling a VPRN service
Re-enabling a VPRN service
VPRN services command reference
Command hierarchies
VPRN configuration commands
VPRN service configuration commands
Spoke-SDP commands
Routed VPLS commands
IGMP commands
Multicast VPN commands
Interface commands
Interface VRRP commands
Interface SAP commands
VPRN SAP QoS and filter commands (for 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE, and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE)
VPRN SAP QoS and filter commands (for 7210 SAS-Mxp)
BGP configuration commands
Router advertisement commands
OSPF configuration commands (IPv4 only)
PIM configuration commands (for 7210 SAS-T (network operating mode) and 7210 SAS-Mxp)
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
VPRN service configuration commands
Generic commands
Global commands
Multicast VPN commands
SDP commands
Interface commands
Router advertisement commands
Interface ICMP commands
Interface SAP commands
Interface SAP filter and QoS policy commands
Interface VRRP commands
PIM commands
Counter mode commands
BGP commands
OSPF commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Common CLI command descriptions
In this chapter
Common service commands
SAP syntax
Appendix: Port-Based Split Horizon
Overview
Topology
Configuration guidelines
Verification
Appendix: DHCP management
DHCP principles
DHCP features
Using Option 82 field
Trusted and untrusted
Common configuration guidelines
Configuration guidelines for DHCP relay and snooping
Configuring Option 82 handling
Standards and protocol support
Customer Documentation and Product Support
Legal notice
Getting started
About this guide
Document structure and content
7210 SAS modes of operation
7210 SAS port modes
7210 SAS services configuration process
Conventions
Precautionary and information messages
Options or substeps in procedures and sequential workflows
Services overview
Introduction
Service types
Service policies
Nokia service model
Service entities
Customers
SAPs
SAP encapsulation types and identifiers
Ethernet encapsulations
Services and SAP encapsulations
Default SAP on a dot1q port
Default SAPs on a QinQ port (supported only on 7210 SAS devices configured in access-uplink mode)
Configuration notes for use of default QinQ SAPs for transit service in a ring deployment
SAP configuration considerations for network mode and access-uplink mode
SAP configuration notes when operating 7210 SAS devices in network mode only
QinQ SAP Configuration Restrictions for 7210 SAS platforms in network operating mode
SAP configuration notes for 7210 SAS platforms in access-uplink operating mode
SDPs
SDP binding
Spoke and mesh SDPs
SDP using BGP route tunnel
SDP keepalives
Mixed-LSP mode of operation
SAP and service scaling with high SAP scale mode
Guidelines for configuring high SAP scale mode
Guidelines for configuring low SAP scale mode
G.8032 Ethernet ring protection switching
Overview of G.8032 operation
Ethernet ring sub-rings
Virtual and non-virtual channel
Ethernet ring sub-ring using non-virtual link
Lag support
OAM considerations
QoS considerations
Support service and solution combinations
Configuration guidelines for G.8032
Service creation process overview
Deploying and provisioning services
Phase 1: core network construction
Phase 2: service administration
Phase 3: service provisioning
Configuration notes
General
Configuring global service entities with CLI
Service model entities
Basic configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring customers accounts
Customer information
Configuring an SDP
SDP configuration tasks
Configuring an SDP
Configuring a mixed-LSP SDP
Ethernet connectivity fault management
MA, MEP, MIP, and MD levels
Common actionable failures
MEP and MIP support
Configuring ETH-CFM parameters
Applying ETH-CFM parameters
Layer 2 control processing
Service management tasks
Modifying customer accounts
Deleting customers
Modifying SDPs
Deleting SDPs
Global services command reference
Command hierarchies
Global service configuration commands
Customer commands
Pseudowire (PW) commands
SDP commands
SAP commands for 7210 SAS platforms operating in network mode
SAP commands for 7210 SAS platforms operating in access-uplink mode
ETH-CFM configuration commands
Show commands
Tools commands
Command descriptions
Global service configuration commands
Generic commands
Customer Management Commands
Pseudowire Commands
SDP commands
SDP keepalive commands
Show commands
Show service commands
Show ETH-CFM commands
Tools commands
Tools perform commands
VLL services
Epipe services
Epipe services overview
Epipe with PBB
Processing packets received with more than two tags on a QinQ SAP in Epipe service
Feature support, configuration notes, and restrictions
Configuration example of Epipe services for processing of packets received with more than two tags on a QinQ SAP
Epipe operational state decoupling
Pseudowire switching
Pseudowire switching with protection
Pseudowire switching behavior
Pseudowire switching TLV
Static-to-dynamic pseudowire switching
Pseudowire redundancy
VLL resilience with two destination PE nodes
Dynamic multi-segment pseudowire routing
Pseudowire routing
Static routing
Explicit paths
Configuring VLLs using dynamic MS-PW
Active/passive T-PE selection
Automatic endpoint configuration
Selecting a path for an MS-PW
Pseudowire templates
Pseudowire redundancy
VCCV OAM for dynamic MS-PWs
VCCV-Ping on dynamic MS-PWs
VCCV-Trace on dynamic MS-PWs
Example dynamic MS-PW configuration
Master-slave operation
Operation of master-slave pseudowire redundancy with existing scenarios
VLL resilience path
VLL resilience for a switched PW path
Access mode resilience Using MC-LAG and pseudowire redundancy
VLL resilience for a switched pseudowire path
Pseudowire redundancy service models
Redundant VLL service model
T-LDP status notification handling rules
Processing endpoint SAP active/standby status bits
Processing and merging
Epipe configuration for MPLS-TP
SDPs
VLL spoke-SDP configuration
Credit-based algorithm
VLAN range for SAPs in an Epipe service
Processing behavior for SAPs using VLAN ranges in access-uplink mode
VLAN range SAPs feature support and restrictions
Processing behavior for SAPs using VLAN ranges in network operating mode
VLL service considerations
SDPs
SAP encapsulations
QoS policies
Filter policies
MAC resources
Configuring a VLL service with CLI
Common configuration tasks
Configuring VLL components
Creating an Epipe service in network mode
Creating an Epipe service in access-uplink mode
Configuring Epipe SAP parameters
Epipe SAP
Local Epipe SAPs
Distributed Epipe Service
Configuring Ingress SAP Parameters
Creating an Epipe service for 7210 SAS-Mxp with range SAPs
Configuring default QinQ SAPs for Epipe transit traffic in a ring scenario in access-uplink mode
Configuring SDP bindings
Using spoke-SDP control words
Configuring VLL resilience
Configuring VLL resilience for a switched pseudowire path
Service management tasks
Modifying Epipe service parameters
Disabling an Epipe service
Re-enabling an Epipe service
Deleting an Epipe service
VLL services command reference
Command hierarchies
VLL service configuration commands
Epipe global commands (for access-uplink operating mode)
Epipe global commands (for network operating mode)
Epipe SAP configuration commands
Epipe SAP meter override commands
Epipe SAP statistics commands
Epipe spoke-SDP configuration commands
Epipe SAP QoS and filter commands (for 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE (standalone and standalone-VC), and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE (standalone) devices)
Epipe SAP QoS and filter commands (for 7210 SAS-Mxp)
Connection profile commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Command descriptions
VLL service configuration commands
Generic commands
VLL global commands
VLL SAP commands
Service filter and QoS policy commands
Epipe Service SAP Statistics Commands
VLL SDP Commands
Connection profile commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Ethernet Virtual Private Networks
EVPN applications
EVPN for MPLS tunnels in E-LAN services
EVPN for MPLS tunnels
BGP-EVPN control plane for MPLS tunnels
EVPN route type 3 — inclusive multicast Ethernet tag route
EVPN route type 2 — MAC/IP advertisement route
EVPN route type 1 — Ethernet Auto-Discovery route
EVPN route type 4 — ES route
BGP tunnel encapsulation extended community
EVPN for MPLS tunnels in VPLS services
EVPN and VPLS integration
Auto-Derived RD in services with multiple BGP families
EVPN multi-homing in VPLS services
EVPN all-active multi-homing
All-active multi-homing procedures
Designated Forwarder election
Split-horizon
Aliasing
All-active multi-homing service model
ES discovery and DF election procedures
Step 1 — ES advertisement and discovery
Step 2 — DF election
Step 3 — DF and non-DF service behavior
Aliasing
Network failures and convergence for all-active multi-homing
Logical failures on ESs and black holes
Transient issues due to MAC route delays
EVPN single-active multi-homing
Single-active multi-homing service model
ES and DF election procedures
Backup PE function
Network failures and convergence for single-active multi-homing
General EVPN topics
ARP and ND snooping and proxy support
Proxy-ARP/ND periodic refresh, unsolicited refresh, and confirm-messages
Proxy-ND and the Router flag in Neighbor Advertisement messages
Procedure to add the R Flag to a specified entry
Configuration guidelines for proxy-ARP and proxy-ND
Proxy-ARP and proxy-ND support for spoke-SDP bindings
BGP-EVPN MAC mobility
BGP-EVPN MAC duplication
Conditional static MAC and protection
BGP and EVPN route selection for EVPN routes
EVPN interaction with other features
EVPN-MPLS with existing VPLS features
EVPN with G.8032 in an access ring
Routing policies for BGP EVPN routes
Configuring an EVPN service with CLI
EVPN-MPLS configuration examples
EVPN single-active multi-homing example
EVPN command reference
Command hierarchies
EVPN configuration commands
EVPN show commands
EVPN clear commands
EVPN tools commands
Command descriptions
EVPN configuration commands
EVPN show commands
EVPN clear commands
Tools commands
Virtual Private LAN Service
VPLS service overview
VPLS packet walk-through in network mode
VPLS packet walk-through in access-uplink mode
VPLS features
VPLS enhancements
VPLS over MPLS in network operating mode
VPLS over QinQ spokes for 7210 SAS devices configured in access-uplink operating mode
VPLS MAC learning and packet forwarding
IGMP snooping in a VPLS service
Configuration guidelines for IGMP snooping in VPLS service
DHCPv4 snooping
DHCPv6 snooping
Client and network-facing service objects
Trusted and untrusted service objects
DHCPv6 relay agent options
DHCPv6 snooping QoS considerations
Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) support in VPLS service
Configuration guidelines for MVR in VPLS services
Layer 2 forwarding table management
FIB size
FIB size alarms
Local and remote aging timers
Disable MAC aging
Disable MAC learning
Unknown MAC discard
VPLS and rate limiting
MAC move
Split horizon SAP groups and split horizon spoke-SDP groups
Configuration guidelines for use of split horizon group in a VPLS service
VPLS and spanning tree protocol
Spanning tree operating modes
Multiple Spanning Tree
Redundancy access to VPLS
MSTP for QinQ SAPs
Provider MSTP
MSTP general principles
MSTP in the 7210 SAS platform
Enhancements to the Spanning Tree Protocol
L2PT termination
BPDU translation
L2PT and BPDU translation
VPLS redundancy
Spoke-SDP redundancy for metro interconnection
Spoke-SDP-based redundant access
Inter-domain VPLS resiliency using multi-chassis endpoints
VPLS access redundancy
STP-based redundant access to VPLS
Redundant access to VPLS without STP
MAC flush message processing
MAC Flush with STP
Selective MAC flush
Dual homing to a VPLS service
VPLS service considerations
SAP encapsulations
VLAN processing
BGP Auto-Discovery for LDP VPLS
BGP AD overview
Information model
FEC element for T-LDP signaling
BGP-AD and Target LDP (T-LDP) interaction
SDP usage
Automatic creation of SDPs
Manually provisioned SDP
Automatic instantiation of pseudowires (SDP bindings)
Mixing statically configured and auto-discovered pseudowires in a VPLS service
Resiliency schemes
Routed VPLS
IES or VPRN IP interface binding
Assigning a service name to a VPLS service
Service binding requirements
Bound Service Name Assignment
Binding a service name to an IP interface
IP interface attached VPLS service constraints
IP interface and VPLS operational state coordination
IP interface MTU and fragmentation
ARP and VPLS FIB interactions
R-VPLS specific ARP cache behavior
The allow-ip-int-binding VPLS flag
R-VPLS SAP support on standard Ethernet ports
LAG port membership constraints
VPLS feature support and restrictions
VPLS SAP ingress IP filter override
QoS support for VPLS SAPs and IP interface in a R-VPLS service
R-VPLS and routing protocols support
Spanning tree and split horizon
R-VPLS MAC ACLs
R-VPLS features supported with MAC ACLs
R-VPLS and IGMPv3 snooping
Configuration guidelines and restrictions for IGMP snooping in R-VPLS
R-VPLS supported functionality and restrictions
Epipe emulation using dot1q VLAN range SAP in VPLS with G.8032
Epipe emulation configuration guidelines and restrictions
Configuring a VPLS service with CLI
Basic configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring VPLS components
Creating a VPLS service
Enabling MAC move
Configuring STP bridge parameters in a VPLS
Bridge STP Admin State
Mode
Bridge Priority
Max Age
Forward Delay
Hello Time
Hold Count
MST Instances
MST Max Hops
MST Name
MST Revision
Configuring a VPLS SAP
Local VPLS SAPs
Distributed VPLS SAPs
Configuring default QinQ SAPs to pass all traffic from access to access-uplink Port without any tag modifications
Configuring SAP-specific STP parameters
SAP STP Administrative State
SAP Virtual Port Number
SAP Priority
SAP Path Cost
SAP Edge Port
SAP Auto Edge
SAP Link Type
MST Instances
STP SAP Operational States
Operationally Disabled
Operationally Discarding
Operationally Learning
Operationally Forwarding
SAP BPDU Encapsulation State
Configuring VPLS SAPs with per service split horizon
Configuring SDP bindings
Configuring VPLS spoke-SDPs with split horizon
Configuring VPLS redundancy
Creating a management VPLS for SAP protection
Creating a management VPLS for spoke-SDP protection
Configuring load Balancing with management VPLS
Configuring a BGP-auto-discovery
Configuring load balancing with management VPLS
Configuring selective MAC flush
Configuring load balancing with management VPLS
Configuring IGMPv3 snooping in RVPLS
Configuring BGP Auto-Discovery
Configuration steps
Configuring AS pseudowire in VPLS
Service management tasks
Modifying VPLS service parameters
Modifying management VPLS parameters
Deleting a management VPLS
Disabling a management VPLS
Deleting a VPLS service
Disabling a VPLS service
Re-enabling a VPLS service
VPLS services command reference
Command hierarchies
VPLS service configuration commands
Global commands
VPLS service xSTP commands
VPLS service SAP DHCP snooping commands
VPLS DHCPv6 snooping commands for SAP and SDP bindings
SAP commands
VPLS SAP QoS and filter commands (for 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE (standalone and standalone-VC), and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE)
VPLS SAP QoS and filter Commands (for 7210 SAS-Mxp)
VPLS service and SAP IGMP snooping and MVR commands
VPLS SAP meter override commands
VPLS service SAP xSTP commands
VPLS SAP statistics commands
Mesh SDP commands
Spoke-SDP commands
Routed VPLS commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
VPLS configuration commands
Generic commands
VPLS service commands
VPLS STP commands
VPLS SAP commands
VPLS service SAP DHCP snooping commands
VPLS DHCPv6 snooping commands for SAP and SDP bindings
ETH-CFM service commands
VPLS SAP statistics commands
VPLS filter and QoS policy commands
VPLS SDP commands
SAP IGMP-snooping commands
Routed VPLS commands
VPLS show commands
IGMP snooping show commands
VPLS clear commands
VPLS debug commands
IEEE 802.1ah Provider Backbone Bridging (PBB)
IEEE 802.1ah PBB overview
PBB features
Integrated PBB-VPLS solution
PBB technology
PBB mapping to existing VPLS configurations
SAP support
PBB B-VPLS
PBB I-VPLS
PBB packet walk-through
PBB ELINE service
PBB resiliency for PBB Epipe service
PBB resiliency for B-VPLS
Access multi-homing for native PBB (B-VPLS over SAP infrastructure)
PBB QoS
PBB ACL support
Configuration guidelines
Configuration guidelines for the 7210 SAS-T
Configuration examples
PBB ELAN and ELINE
MC-LAG multi-homing for native PBB
PBB command reference
Command hierarchies
PBB service commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
PBB service configuration commands
PBB show commands
PBB clear commands
PBB debug commands
Internet Enhanced Service
IES service overview
IES features
IP interfaces
IPv6 support for IES IP interfaces (access-uplink operating mode)
IPv6 support for IES IP interfaces (network operating mode)
Encapsulations
Routing protocols
CPE connectivity check
QoS policies
CPU QoS for IES interfaces in access-uplink mode
CPU QoS for IES access interfaces in network mode
Filter policies
VRRP support for IES IP interfaces in network operating mode
Configuring an IES service with CLI
Basic configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring IES Components
Configuring an IES service
Configuring IES interface parameters
Network mode
Access-uplink mode
Configuring IES SAP parameters
Configuring VRRP
Service management tasks
Modifying IES service parameters
Deleting an IES service
Disabling an IES service
Re-enabling an IES service
IES services command reference
Command hierarchies
IES configuration commands
Global commands
Interface commands (network operating mode)
Interface commands (access-uplink operating mode)
RVPLS commands (network operating mode)
RVPLS commands (access-uplink operating mode)
Interface SAP commands (network and access-uplink operating mode)
IES SAP QoS and filter commands (for 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE, and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE)
IES SAP QoS and filter commands (for 7210 SAS-Mxp)
VRRP commands
Interface IPv6 commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
IES service configuration commands
Generic commands
IES global commands
IES interface IPv6 commands
IES interface commands
Interface VRRP commands
IES interface ICMP commands
IES SAP commands
IES QoS and filter commands
IES interface SAP statistics commands
Show commands
Virtual Private Routed Network service
VPRN service overview
Routing prerequisites
BGP support
Route distinguishers
Route reflector
Customer Edge to Provider Edge route exchange
Route redistribution
CPE connectivity check
Constrained Route Distribution
Constrained VPN route distribution based on route targets
Configuring the route target address family
Originating RT constraint routes
Receiving and re-advertising RT constraint routes
Using RT constraint routes
BGP fast reroute in a VPRN
BGP fast reroute in a VPRN configuration
VPRN features
IP interfaces
DHCP and DHCPv6
DHCP relay and DHCPv6 relay
DHCP relay
DHCP options
DHCPv6 Relay
DHCPv6 options
SAPs
IPv6 support for VPRN IP interfaces
Encapsulations
QoS policies
Filter policies
CPU QoS for VPRN interfaces
CE to PE routing protocols
PE to PE tunneling mechanisms
Per-VRF route limiting
Exporting MP-BGP VPN routes
Configuration guidelines
Spoke-SDPs
Using OSPF in IP-VPNs
Service label mode of a VPRN
Multicast in IP-VPN applications
Multicast protocols supported in the provider network
MVPN Using BGP control plane
MVPN membership auto-discovery using BGP
Provider tunnel support
Inter-AS VPRNs
Configuring a VPRN service with CLI
Basic configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring VPRN components
Creating a VPRN service
Configuring global VPRN parameters
Configuring Router Interfaces
Configuring VPRN protocols - BGP
Configuring VPRN BGP group and neighbor parameters
VPRN BGP CLI syntax
Configuring a VPRN interface
Configuring a VPRN interface SAP
Configuring VPRN protocols - OSPF
VPRN OSPF CLI syntax
Service management tasks
Modifying VPRN service parameters
Deleting a VPRN service
Disabling a VPRN service
Re-enabling a VPRN service
VPRN services command reference
Command hierarchies
VPRN configuration commands
VPRN service configuration commands
Spoke-SDP commands
Routed VPLS commands
IGMP commands
Multicast VPN commands
Interface commands
Interface VRRP commands
Interface SAP commands
VPRN SAP QoS and filter commands (for 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE, and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE)
VPRN SAP QoS and filter commands (for 7210 SAS-Mxp)
BGP configuration commands
Router advertisement commands
OSPF configuration commands (IPv4 only)
PIM configuration commands (for 7210 SAS-T (network operating mode) and 7210 SAS-Mxp)
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
VPRN service configuration commands
Generic commands
Global commands
Multicast VPN commands
SDP commands
Interface commands
Router advertisement commands
Interface ICMP commands
Interface SAP commands
Interface SAP filter and QoS policy commands
Interface VRRP commands
PIM commands
Counter mode commands
BGP commands
OSPF commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Common CLI command descriptions
In this chapter
Common service commands
SAP syntax
Appendix: Port-Based Split Horizon
Overview
Topology
Configuration guidelines
Verification
Appendix: DHCP management
DHCP principles
DHCP features
Using Option 82 field
Trusted and untrusted
Common configuration guidelines
Configuration guidelines for DHCP relay and snooping
Configuring Option 82 handling
Standards and protocol support
Customer Documentation and Product Support
7210 SAS-R6, R12 Services Guide Release 22.9.R1
Legal notice
Getting started
About this guide
Document structure and content
7210 SAS modes of operation
7210 SAS port modes
7210 SAS services configuration process
Conventions
Precautionary and information messages
Options or substeps in procedures and sequential workflows
Services overview
Introduction
Service types
Service policies
Nokia service model
Service entities
Customers
SAPs
SAP encapsulation types and identifiers
Ethernet encapsulations
Services and SAP encapsulations
SAP configuration considerations
QinQ SAP configuration restrictions for 7210 SAS in network mode only
SDPs
SDP binding
Spoke and mesh SDPs
SDP using BGP route tunnel
SDP keepalives
SDP administrative groups
Mixed-LSP mode of operation
G.8032 Ethernet ring protection switching
SAP and service scaling with high SAP scale mode
Guidelines for configuring high SAP scale mode
Guidelines for configuring low SAP scale mode
Overview of G.8032 operation
Ethernet ring sub-rings
Virtual and non-virtual channel
Ethernet ring sub-ring using non-virtual link
Support for hardware-based 100ms CCM timers for G.8032 MEPs
Configuration guidelines for 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
LAG support
OAM considerations
QoS considerations
Support service and solution combinations
Configuration guidelines for G.8032
Service creation process overview
Deploying and provisioning services
Phase 1: core network construction
Phase 2: service administration
Phase 3: service provisioning
Configuration notes
General
Configuring global service entities with CLI
Service model entities
Basic configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring customer accounts
Customer information
Configuring an SDP
SDP configuration tasks
Configuring an SDP
Configuring a mixed-LSP SDP
Ethernet Connectivity Fault Management
Common actionable failures
MEP and MIP support
Configuring ETH-CFM parameters
Applying ETH-CFM parameters
Service management tasks
Modifying customer accounts
Deleting customers
Modifying SDPs
Deleting SDPs
Layer 2 Control Processing
Global services command reference
Command hierarchies
Customer commands
Pseudowire (PW) commands (applicable only for 7210 SAS devices configured in network mode)
SAP commands for 7210 SAS devices configured in access or network mode
ETH-CFM configuration commands
Show commands
Tools perform commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Customer management commands
Pseudowire commands
SDP commands
SDP keepalive commands
Show commands
Service show commands
ETH-CFM show commands
Tools perform commands
VLL services
Ethernet pipe (Epipe) services
Epipe service overview
Support for processing of packets received with more than 2 tags on a QinQ SAP in Epipe service (only on 7210 SAS devices configured in network mode)
Feature support, configuration notes and restrictions
Epipe oper state decoupling
Pseudowire switching
Pseudowire switching with protection
Pseudowire switching behavior
Pseudowire switching TLV
Static-to-dynamic pseudowire switching
Pseudowire redundancy
VLL resilience with two destination PE nodes
Dynamic Multi-Segment Pseudowire Routing
Overview
Pseudowire routing
Static routing
Explicit paths
Configuring VLLs using dynamic MS-PWs
Active/passive T-PE selection
Automatic endpoint configuration
Selecting a path for an MS-PW
Pseudowire templates
Pseudowire redundancy
VCCV OAM for dynamic MS-PWs
VCCV-ping on dynamic MS-PWs
VCCV-trace on dynamic MS-PWs
Example dynamic MS-PW configuration
Master-slave operation
Operation of master-slave pseudowire redundancy with existing scenarios
VLL resilience
VLL resilience for a switched PW path
Access node resilience using MC-LAG and pseudowire redundancy
VLL resilience for a switched pseudowire path
Pseudowire redundancy service models
Redundant VLL service model
T-LDP status notification handling rules
Processing endpoint SAP active/standby status bits
Processing and merging
Epipe configuration for MPLS-TP
SDPs
VLL spoke-SDP configuration
Credit-based algorithm
VLAN range for SAPs in an Epipe service
VLAN range SAPs feature support and restrictions
Processing behavior for SAPs using VLAN ranges in network mode
VLL service considerations
SDPs
SAP encapsulations
QoS policies
Filter policies
MAC resources
Configuring a VLL service with CLI
Basic configurations
Common configuration tasks
Configuring VLL components
Creating an Epipe service
Configuring Epipe SAP parameters
Local Epipe SAPs
Using spoke-SDP control words
Pseudowire configuration notes
Configuring VLL resilience
Configuring VLL resilience for a switched pseudowire path
Service management tasks
Modifying Epipe service parameters
Disabling an Epipe service
Re-enabling an Epipe service
Deleting an Epipe service
VLL services command reference
Command hierarchies
Epipe service configuration commands
Epipe global commands in network mode
Epipe SAP configuration commands
Epipe SAP meter override commands
Epipe SAP statistics commands
Epipe spoke-SDP configuration commands
Epipe SAP filter and QoS configuration commands
Connection profile commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
VLL global commands
VLL SAP commands
Service filter and QoS policy commands
VLL SDP commands
Connection profile commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Ethernet Virtual Private Networks
EVPN applications
EVPN for MPLS tunnels in E-LAN services
EVPN for MPLS tunnels
BGP-EVPN control plane for MPLS tunnels
EVPN route type 3 — inclusive multicast Ethernet tag route
EVPN route type 2 — MAC/IP advertisement route
EVPN route type 1 — Ethernet Auto-Discovery route
EVPN route type 4 — ES route
BGP tunnel encapsulation extended community
EVPN for MPLS tunnels in VPLS services
EVPN and VPLS integration
Auto-derived RD in services with multiple BGP families
EVPN multi-homing in VPLS services
EVPN all-active multi-homing
All-active multi-homing procedures
Designated Forwarder election
Split-horizon
Aliasing
All-active multi-homing service model
ES discovery and DF election procedures
Step 1 — ES advertisement and discovery
Step 2 — DF election
Step 3 — DF and non-DF service behavior
Aliasing
Network failures and convergence for all-active multi-homing
Logical failures on ESs and black holes
Transient issues because of MAC route delays
EVPN single-active multi-homing
Single-active multi-homing service model
ES and DF election procedures
Backup PE function
Network failures and convergence for single-active multi-homing
General EVPN topics
ARP and ND snooping and proxy support
Proxy-ARP/ND periodic refresh, unsolicited refresh, and confirm-messages
Proxy-ND and the Router flag in Neighbor Advertisement messages
Procedure to add the R flag to a specified entry
Configuration guidelines for proxy-ARP and proxy-ND
Proxy-ARP and proxy-ND support for spoke-SDP bindings
BGP-EVPN MAC mobility
BGP-EVPN MAC duplication
Conditional static MAC and protection
BGP and EVPN route selection for EVPN routes
EVPN interaction with other features
EVPN-MPLS with existing VPLS features
EVPN with G.8032 in an access ring
Routing policies for BGP EVPN routes
Configuring an EVPN service with CLI
EVPN-MPLS configuration examples
EVPN single-active multi-homing example
EVPN command reference
Command hierarchies
EVPN configuration commands
EVPN show commands
EVPN clear commands
EVPN tools commands
Command descriptions
EVPN configuration commands
EVPN show commands
EVPN clear commands
Tools commands
Virtual Private LAN Service
VPLS service overview
VPLS packet walkthrough
VPLS features
VPLS enhancements
VPLS over MPLS
VPLS MAC learning and packet forwarding
Configuration notes for VPLS forwarding
IGMP snooping in VPLS service
Configuration guidelines for IGMP snooping in VPLS service
Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) support in VPLS service
Configuration guidelines for MVR in VPLS service
Layer 2 forwarding table management
FIB size
FIB size alarms
Local and remote aging timers
Disable MAC aging
Disable MAC learning
Unknown MAC discard
VPLS and rate limiting
MAC move
Split horizon SAP groups and split horizon spoke-SDP groups
Configuration guidelines for use of split horizon group in a VPLS service
VPLS and Spanning Tree Protocol
Spanning tree operating modes
Multiple Spanning Tree
Configuration notes for Spanning Tree Protocol, L2PT and BPDU translation
MSTP for QinQ SAPs
Enhancements to the Spanning Tree Protocol
L2PT termination
BPDU translation
L2PT and BPDU translation
VPLS redundancy
Spoke-SDP redundancy for metro interconnection
Spoke-SDP-based redundant access
Inter-domain VPLS resiliency using multi-chassis endpoints
VPLS access redundancy
STP-based redundant access to VPLS
Redundant access to VPLS without STP
MAC flush message processing
MAC flush with STP
Selective MAC flush
Dual homing to a VPLS service
VPLS service considerations
SAP encapsulations
VLAN processing
BGP Auto-Discovery for LDP VPLS
BGP AD overview
Information model
FEC element for T-LDP signaling
BGP-AD and Target LDP (T-LDP) interaction
SDP usage
Automatic creation of SDPs
Manually provisioned SDP
Automatic instantiation of pseudowires (SDP bindings)
Mixing statically configured and auto-discovered pseudowires in a VPLS service
Resiliency schemes
Routed VPLS
IES or VPRN IP interface binding
Assigning a service name to a VPLS service
Service binding requirements
Bound service name assignment
Binding a service name to an IP interface
Routed VPLS specific ARP cache behavior
The allow-ip-int-binding VPLS flag
Routed VPLS SAPs only supported on standard Ethernet ports
LAG port membership constraints
VPLS feature support and restrictions
VPLS SAP ingress IP filter override
QoS support for VPLS SAPs and IP interface in a routed VPLS service
Routed VPLS supported routing related protocols
Spanning tree and split horizon
Routed VPLS and IGMPv3 snooping
Configuration guidelines and restrictions for IGMP snooping in R-VPLS
Routed VPLS supported functionality and restrictions
Configuring a VPLS service with CLI
Basic configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring VPLS components
Creating a VPLS service
Enabling MAC move
Configuring STP bridge parameters in a VPLS
Bridge STP admin state
Mode
Bridge priority
Max age
Forward delay
Hello time
Hold count
MST instances
MST max hops
MST name
MST revision
Configuring a VPLS SAP
Local VPLS SAPs
Distributed VPLS SAPs
Configuring SAP-specific STP parameters
SAP STP administrative state
SAP virtual port number
SAP priority
SAP path cost
SAP edge port
SAP auto edge
SAP link type
MST instances
STP SAP operational states
Operationally disabled
Operationally discarding
Operationally learning
Operationally forwarding
SAP BPDU encapsulation state
Configuring VPLS SAPs with per service split horizon
Configuring SDP bindings
Configuring VPLS spoke SDPs with split horizon
Configuring VPLS redundancy
Creating a management VPLS for SAP protection
Creating a management VPLS for spoke-SDP protection
Configuring a BGP-auto-discovery
Configuring load balancing with management VPLS
Configuring selective MAC Flush
Configuring IGMPv3 snooping in RVPLS
Configuring BGP Auto-Discovery
Configuration steps
Configuring AS pseudowire in VPLS
Service management tasks
Modifying VPLS service parameters
Modifying management VPLS parameters
Deleting a management VPLS
Disabling a management VPLS
Deleting a VPLS service
Disabling a VPLS service
Re-enabling a VPLS service
VPLS services command reference
Command hierarchies
VPLS configuration commands
VPLS xSTP commands
VPLS SAP DHCP snooping commands
VPLS SAP commands
VPLS SAP filter and QoS commands
VPLS SAP IGMP snooping and MVR commands
VPLS SAP meter override commands
VPLS SAP queue override commands
VPLS SAP xSTP commands
VPLS SAP statistics commands
VPLS mesh SDP commands
VPLS spoke-SDP commands
Routed VPLS commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
VPLS configuration commands
Generic commands
VPLS commands
VPLS STP commands
VPLS SAP commands
VPLS SAP statistics commands
ETH-CFM service commands
VPLS filter and QoS policy commands
VPLS SDP commands
Routed VPLS commands
Show commands
VPLS show commands
IGMP snooping show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Internet Enhanced Service
IES service overview
IES features
IP interfaces
IPv6 support for IES IP interfaces (in network mode)
SAPs
Encapsulations
Routing protocols
CPE connectivity check
QoS policies
CPU QoS for IES access interfaces in network mode
Filter policies
VRRP support for IES IP interfaces in network mode
Configuring an IES service with CLI
Basic configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring IES components
Configuring an IES service
Configuring IES interface parameters
Configuring SAP parameters
Configuring VRRP
Service management tasks
Modifying IES service parameters
Deleting an IES service
Disabling an IES service
Re-enabling an IES service
IES services command reference
Command hierarchies
Global commands
Interface commands
Interface SAP commands
Interface SAP filter and QoS commands
VRRP commands (applicable only for network mode)
Routed VPLS commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
IES global commands
IES interface IPv6 commands
IES interface commands
IES interface ICMP commands
IES SAP commands
IES interface filter and QoS policy commands
Routed VPLS commands
IES show commands
Virtual Private Routed Network service
VPRN service overview
Routing prerequisites
BGP support
Route distinguishers
Route reflector
CE to PE route exchange
Route redistribution
CPE connectivity check
Constrained route distribution
Constrained VPN route distribution based on route targets
Configuring the route target address family
Originating RT constraint routes
Receiving and re-advertising RT constraint routes
Using RT constraint routes
BGP fast reroute in a VPRN
BGP fast reroute in a VPRN configuration
VPRN features
IP interfaces
SAPs
IPv6 support for VPRN IP interfaces (in network mode)
Encapsulations
QoS policies
Filter policies
CPU QoS for VPRN interfaces
CE to PE routing protocols
PE to PE tunneling mechanisms
Per VRF route limiting
Exporting MP-BGP VPN routes
Configuration guidelines
Spoke SDPs
T-LDP status signaling for spoke SDPs terminating on IES/VPRN
GR Helper for CE-PE Routing Protocols
Spoke-SDP Redundancy into IES/VPRN
Using OSPF in IP-VPNs
Service label mode of a VPRN
Multicast in IP-VPN applications
Multicast protocols supported in the provider network
MVPN using BGP control plane
MVPN membership auto-discovery using BGP
Provider tunnel support
Inter-AS VPRNs
Configuring a VPRN service with CLI
Basic configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring VPRN components
Creating a VPRN service
Configuring global VPRN parameters
Configuring router interfaces
Configuring VPRN protocols - BGP
Configuring VPRN BGP group and neighbor parameters
VPRN BGP CLI syntax
Configuring a VPRN interface
Configuring a VPRN interface SAP
Configuring VPRN protocols - OSPF
VPRN OSPF CLI syntax
Service management tasks
Modifying VPRN service parameters
Deleting a VPRN service
Disabling a VPRN service
Re-enabling a VPRN service
VPRN services command reference
Command hierarchies
VPRN service configuration commands
Multicast VPN commands
Interface commands
Interface VRRP commands (IPv4 only - applicable for network mode only)
Interface SAP commands
Interface SAP filter and QoS commands
Routed VPLS commands
BGP configuration commands
Router advertisement commands
OSPF configuration commands (IPv4 only)
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Global commands
Multicast VPN commands
SDP commands
Interface commands
Router advertisement commands
Interface Internet Control Message Protocol commands
Interface Service Access Point commands
Interface anti-spoofing commands
Interface SAP filter and QoS policy commands
Routed VPLS commands
Interface VRRP commands
Counter mode commands
BGP commands
OSPF commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Common CLI command descriptions
In this chapter
Common service commands
SAP syntax
Appendix: DHCP management
DHCP principles
DHCP features
Using Option 82 field
Trusted and untrusted
DHCP snooping
Common configuration guidelines
Configuration guidelines for DHCP relay and snooping
Configuring Option 82 handling
Standards and protocol support
Customer Documentation and Product Support
Legal notice
Getting started
About this guide
Document structure and content
7210 SAS modes of operation
7210 SAS port modes
7210 SAS services configuration process
Conventions
Precautionary and information messages
Options or substeps in procedures and sequential workflows
Services overview
Introduction
Service types
Service policies
Nokia service model
Service entities
Customers
SAPs
SAP encapsulation types and identifiers
Ethernet encapsulations
Services and SAP encapsulations
SAP configuration considerations
QinQ SAP configuration restrictions for 7210 SAS in network mode only
SDPs
SDP binding
Spoke and mesh SDPs
SDP using BGP route tunnel
SDP keepalives
SDP administrative groups
Mixed-LSP mode of operation
G.8032 Ethernet ring protection switching
SAP and service scaling with high SAP scale mode
Guidelines for configuring high SAP scale mode
Guidelines for configuring low SAP scale mode
Overview of G.8032 operation
Ethernet ring sub-rings
Virtual and non-virtual channel
Ethernet ring sub-ring using non-virtual link
Support for hardware-based 100ms CCM timers for G.8032 MEPs
Configuration guidelines for 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
LAG support
OAM considerations
QoS considerations
Support service and solution combinations
Configuration guidelines for G.8032
Service creation process overview
Deploying and provisioning services
Phase 1: core network construction
Phase 2: service administration
Phase 3: service provisioning
Configuration notes
General
Configuring global service entities with CLI
Service model entities
Basic configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring customer accounts
Customer information
Configuring an SDP
SDP configuration tasks
Configuring an SDP
Configuring a mixed-LSP SDP
Ethernet Connectivity Fault Management
Common actionable failures
MEP and MIP support
Configuring ETH-CFM parameters
Applying ETH-CFM parameters
Service management tasks
Modifying customer accounts
Deleting customers
Modifying SDPs
Deleting SDPs
Layer 2 Control Processing
Global services command reference
Command hierarchies
Customer commands
Pseudowire (PW) commands (applicable only for 7210 SAS devices configured in network mode)
SAP commands for 7210 SAS devices configured in access or network mode
ETH-CFM configuration commands
Show commands
Tools perform commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Customer management commands
Pseudowire commands
SDP commands
SDP keepalive commands
Show commands
Service show commands
ETH-CFM show commands
Tools perform commands
VLL services
Ethernet pipe (Epipe) services
Epipe service overview
Support for processing of packets received with more than 2 tags on a QinQ SAP in Epipe service (only on 7210 SAS devices configured in network mode)
Feature support, configuration notes and restrictions
Epipe oper state decoupling
Pseudowire switching
Pseudowire switching with protection
Pseudowire switching behavior
Pseudowire switching TLV
Static-to-dynamic pseudowire switching
Pseudowire redundancy
VLL resilience with two destination PE nodes
Dynamic Multi-Segment Pseudowire Routing
Overview
Pseudowire routing
Static routing
Explicit paths
Configuring VLLs using dynamic MS-PWs
Active/passive T-PE selection
Automatic endpoint configuration
Selecting a path for an MS-PW
Pseudowire templates
Pseudowire redundancy
VCCV OAM for dynamic MS-PWs
VCCV-ping on dynamic MS-PWs
VCCV-trace on dynamic MS-PWs
Example dynamic MS-PW configuration
Master-slave operation
Operation of master-slave pseudowire redundancy with existing scenarios
VLL resilience
VLL resilience for a switched PW path
Access node resilience using MC-LAG and pseudowire redundancy
VLL resilience for a switched pseudowire path
Pseudowire redundancy service models
Redundant VLL service model
T-LDP status notification handling rules
Processing endpoint SAP active/standby status bits
Processing and merging
Epipe configuration for MPLS-TP
SDPs
VLL spoke-SDP configuration
Credit-based algorithm
VLAN range for SAPs in an Epipe service
VLAN range SAPs feature support and restrictions
Processing behavior for SAPs using VLAN ranges in network mode
VLL service considerations
SDPs
SAP encapsulations
QoS policies
Filter policies
MAC resources
Configuring a VLL service with CLI
Basic configurations
Common configuration tasks
Configuring VLL components
Creating an Epipe service
Configuring Epipe SAP parameters
Local Epipe SAPs
Using spoke-SDP control words
Pseudowire configuration notes
Configuring VLL resilience
Configuring VLL resilience for a switched pseudowire path
Service management tasks
Modifying Epipe service parameters
Disabling an Epipe service
Re-enabling an Epipe service
Deleting an Epipe service
VLL services command reference
Command hierarchies
Epipe service configuration commands
Epipe global commands in network mode
Epipe SAP configuration commands
Epipe SAP meter override commands
Epipe SAP statistics commands
Epipe spoke-SDP configuration commands
Epipe SAP filter and QoS configuration commands
Connection profile commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
VLL global commands
VLL SAP commands
Service filter and QoS policy commands
VLL SDP commands
Connection profile commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Ethernet Virtual Private Networks
EVPN applications
EVPN for MPLS tunnels in E-LAN services
EVPN for MPLS tunnels
BGP-EVPN control plane for MPLS tunnels
EVPN route type 3 — inclusive multicast Ethernet tag route
EVPN route type 2 — MAC/IP advertisement route
EVPN route type 1 — Ethernet Auto-Discovery route
EVPN route type 4 — ES route
BGP tunnel encapsulation extended community
EVPN for MPLS tunnels in VPLS services
EVPN and VPLS integration
Auto-derived RD in services with multiple BGP families
EVPN multi-homing in VPLS services
EVPN all-active multi-homing
All-active multi-homing procedures
Designated Forwarder election
Split-horizon
Aliasing
All-active multi-homing service model
ES discovery and DF election procedures
Step 1 — ES advertisement and discovery
Step 2 — DF election
Step 3 — DF and non-DF service behavior
Aliasing
Network failures and convergence for all-active multi-homing
Logical failures on ESs and black holes
Transient issues because of MAC route delays
EVPN single-active multi-homing
Single-active multi-homing service model
ES and DF election procedures
Backup PE function
Network failures and convergence for single-active multi-homing
General EVPN topics
ARP and ND snooping and proxy support
Proxy-ARP/ND periodic refresh, unsolicited refresh, and confirm-messages
Proxy-ND and the Router flag in Neighbor Advertisement messages
Procedure to add the R flag to a specified entry
Configuration guidelines for proxy-ARP and proxy-ND
Proxy-ARP and proxy-ND support for spoke-SDP bindings
BGP-EVPN MAC mobility
BGP-EVPN MAC duplication
Conditional static MAC and protection
BGP and EVPN route selection for EVPN routes
EVPN interaction with other features
EVPN-MPLS with existing VPLS features
EVPN with G.8032 in an access ring
Routing policies for BGP EVPN routes
Configuring an EVPN service with CLI
EVPN-MPLS configuration examples
EVPN single-active multi-homing example
EVPN command reference
Command hierarchies
EVPN configuration commands
EVPN show commands
EVPN clear commands
EVPN tools commands
Command descriptions
EVPN configuration commands
EVPN show commands
EVPN clear commands
Tools commands
Virtual Private LAN Service
VPLS service overview
VPLS packet walkthrough
VPLS features
VPLS enhancements
VPLS over MPLS
VPLS MAC learning and packet forwarding
Configuration notes for VPLS forwarding
IGMP snooping in VPLS service
Configuration guidelines for IGMP snooping in VPLS service
Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) support in VPLS service
Configuration guidelines for MVR in VPLS service
Layer 2 forwarding table management
FIB size
FIB size alarms
Local and remote aging timers
Disable MAC aging
Disable MAC learning
Unknown MAC discard
VPLS and rate limiting
MAC move
Split horizon SAP groups and split horizon spoke-SDP groups
Configuration guidelines for use of split horizon group in a VPLS service
VPLS and Spanning Tree Protocol
Spanning tree operating modes
Multiple Spanning Tree
Configuration notes for Spanning Tree Protocol, L2PT and BPDU translation
MSTP for QinQ SAPs
Enhancements to the Spanning Tree Protocol
L2PT termination
BPDU translation
L2PT and BPDU translation
VPLS redundancy
Spoke-SDP redundancy for metro interconnection
Spoke-SDP-based redundant access
Inter-domain VPLS resiliency using multi-chassis endpoints
VPLS access redundancy
STP-based redundant access to VPLS
Redundant access to VPLS without STP
MAC flush message processing
MAC flush with STP
Selective MAC flush
Dual homing to a VPLS service
VPLS service considerations
SAP encapsulations
VLAN processing
BGP Auto-Discovery for LDP VPLS
BGP AD overview
Information model
FEC element for T-LDP signaling
BGP-AD and Target LDP (T-LDP) interaction
SDP usage
Automatic creation of SDPs
Manually provisioned SDP
Automatic instantiation of pseudowires (SDP bindings)
Mixing statically configured and auto-discovered pseudowires in a VPLS service
Resiliency schemes
Routed VPLS
IES or VPRN IP interface binding
Assigning a service name to a VPLS service
Service binding requirements
Bound service name assignment
Binding a service name to an IP interface
Routed VPLS specific ARP cache behavior
The allow-ip-int-binding VPLS flag
Routed VPLS SAPs only supported on standard Ethernet ports
LAG port membership constraints
VPLS feature support and restrictions
VPLS SAP ingress IP filter override
QoS support for VPLS SAPs and IP interface in a routed VPLS service
Routed VPLS supported routing related protocols
Spanning tree and split horizon
Routed VPLS and IGMPv3 snooping
Configuration guidelines and restrictions for IGMP snooping in R-VPLS
Routed VPLS supported functionality and restrictions
Configuring a VPLS service with CLI
Basic configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring VPLS components
Creating a VPLS service
Enabling MAC move
Configuring STP bridge parameters in a VPLS
Bridge STP admin state
Mode
Bridge priority
Max age
Forward delay
Hello time
Hold count
MST instances
MST max hops
MST name
MST revision
Configuring a VPLS SAP
Local VPLS SAPs
Distributed VPLS SAPs
Configuring SAP-specific STP parameters
SAP STP administrative state
SAP virtual port number
SAP priority
SAP path cost
SAP edge port
SAP auto edge
SAP link type
MST instances
STP SAP operational states
Operationally disabled
Operationally discarding
Operationally learning
Operationally forwarding
SAP BPDU encapsulation state
Configuring VPLS SAPs with per service split horizon
Configuring SDP bindings
Configuring VPLS spoke SDPs with split horizon
Configuring VPLS redundancy
Creating a management VPLS for SAP protection
Creating a management VPLS for spoke-SDP protection
Configuring a BGP-auto-discovery
Configuring load balancing with management VPLS
Configuring selective MAC Flush
Configuring IGMPv3 snooping in RVPLS
Configuring BGP Auto-Discovery
Configuration steps
Configuring AS pseudowire in VPLS
Service management tasks
Modifying VPLS service parameters
Modifying management VPLS parameters
Deleting a management VPLS
Disabling a management VPLS
Deleting a VPLS service
Disabling a VPLS service
Re-enabling a VPLS service
VPLS services command reference
Command hierarchies
VPLS configuration commands
VPLS xSTP commands
VPLS SAP DHCP snooping commands
VPLS SAP commands
VPLS SAP filter and QoS commands
VPLS SAP IGMP snooping and MVR commands
VPLS SAP meter override commands
VPLS SAP queue override commands
VPLS SAP xSTP commands
VPLS SAP statistics commands
VPLS mesh SDP commands
VPLS spoke-SDP commands
Routed VPLS commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
VPLS configuration commands
Generic commands
VPLS commands
VPLS STP commands
VPLS SAP commands
VPLS SAP statistics commands
ETH-CFM service commands
VPLS filter and QoS policy commands
VPLS SDP commands
Routed VPLS commands
Show commands
VPLS show commands
IGMP snooping show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Internet Enhanced Service
IES service overview
IES features
IP interfaces
IPv6 support for IES IP interfaces (in network mode)
SAPs
Encapsulations
Routing protocols
CPE connectivity check
QoS policies
CPU QoS for IES access interfaces in network mode
Filter policies
VRRP support for IES IP interfaces in network mode
Configuring an IES service with CLI
Basic configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring IES components
Configuring an IES service
Configuring IES interface parameters
Configuring SAP parameters
Configuring VRRP
Service management tasks
Modifying IES service parameters
Deleting an IES service
Disabling an IES service
Re-enabling an IES service
IES services command reference
Command hierarchies
Global commands
Interface commands
Interface SAP commands
Interface SAP filter and QoS commands
VRRP commands (applicable only for network mode)
Routed VPLS commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
IES global commands
IES interface IPv6 commands
IES interface commands
IES interface ICMP commands
IES SAP commands
IES interface filter and QoS policy commands
Routed VPLS commands
IES show commands
Virtual Private Routed Network service
VPRN service overview
Routing prerequisites
BGP support
Route distinguishers
Route reflector
CE to PE route exchange
Route redistribution
CPE connectivity check
Constrained route distribution
Constrained VPN route distribution based on route targets
Configuring the route target address family
Originating RT constraint routes
Receiving and re-advertising RT constraint routes
Using RT constraint routes
BGP fast reroute in a VPRN
BGP fast reroute in a VPRN configuration
VPRN features
IP interfaces
SAPs
IPv6 support for VPRN IP interfaces (in network mode)
Encapsulations
QoS policies
Filter policies
CPU QoS for VPRN interfaces
CE to PE routing protocols
PE to PE tunneling mechanisms
Per VRF route limiting
Exporting MP-BGP VPN routes
Configuration guidelines
Spoke SDPs
T-LDP status signaling for spoke SDPs terminating on IES/VPRN
GR Helper for CE-PE Routing Protocols
Spoke-SDP Redundancy into IES/VPRN
Using OSPF in IP-VPNs
Service label mode of a VPRN
Multicast in IP-VPN applications
Multicast protocols supported in the provider network
MVPN using BGP control plane
MVPN membership auto-discovery using BGP
Provider tunnel support
Inter-AS VPRNs
Configuring a VPRN service with CLI
Basic configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring VPRN components
Creating a VPRN service
Configuring global VPRN parameters
Configuring router interfaces
Configuring VPRN protocols - BGP
Configuring VPRN BGP group and neighbor parameters
VPRN BGP CLI syntax
Configuring a VPRN interface
Configuring a VPRN interface SAP
Configuring VPRN protocols - OSPF
VPRN OSPF CLI syntax
Service management tasks
Modifying VPRN service parameters
Deleting a VPRN service
Disabling a VPRN service
Re-enabling a VPRN service
VPRN services command reference
Command hierarchies
VPRN service configuration commands
Multicast VPN commands
Interface commands
Interface VRRP commands (IPv4 only - applicable for network mode only)
Interface SAP commands
Interface SAP filter and QoS commands
Routed VPLS commands
BGP configuration commands
Router advertisement commands
OSPF configuration commands (IPv4 only)
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Global commands
Multicast VPN commands
SDP commands
Interface commands
Router advertisement commands
Interface Internet Control Message Protocol commands
Interface Service Access Point commands
Interface anti-spoofing commands
Interface SAP filter and QoS policy commands
Routed VPLS commands
Interface VRRP commands
Counter mode commands
BGP commands
OSPF commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Common CLI command descriptions
In this chapter
Common service commands
SAP syntax
Appendix: DHCP management
DHCP principles
DHCP features
Using Option 82 field
Trusted and untrusted
DHCP snooping
Common configuration guidelines
Configuration guidelines for DHCP relay and snooping
Configuring Option 82 handling
Standards and protocol support
Customer Documentation and Product Support
7210 SAS-D, Dxp, K 2F1C2T, K 2F6C4T, K 3SFP+ 8C System Management Guide Release 22.9.R1
Legal notice
Getting started
About this guide
Document structure and content
7210 SAS modes of operation
7210 SAS port modes
7210 SAS system management configuration process
Security
Authentication, authorization, and accounting
Authentication
Local authentication
RADIUS authentication
RADIUS server selection
Direct mode
Round-robin mode
Server reachability detection
Application-specific behavior
Operator management
RADIUS authentication
RADIUS accounting
RADIUS PE-discovery
TACACS+ authentication
Password hashing
Authorization
Local authorization
RADIUS authorization
TACACS+ authorization
Accounting
RADIUS accounting
TACACS+ accounting
Security controls
When a server does not respond
Access request flow
Control and management traffic protection
CPM management access filters
CPM protocols and ports
Management Access Filter
MAF packet match
MAF IPv4/IPv6 filter entry match criteria
MAF policy action
MAF policy statistics and logging
Centralized CPU protection
Vendor-specific attributes (VSAS)
User (VSA) configuration example
Other security features
Security algorithms
Secure Shell (SSH)
SSH PKI authentication
User public key generation
MAC client and server list
Cipher client and server list
KEX client and server list
Exponential login back-off
User lockout
Encryption
802.1x network access control
TCP Enhanced Authentication Option
Packet formats
Keychain
Configuration notes
General
Configuring security with CLI
Setting up security attributes
Configuring authentication
Configuring authorization
Configuring accounting
Security configurations
Security configuration procedures
Configuring Management Access Filters
Configuring password management parameters
Configuring profiles
Configuring users
Configuring keychains
Copying and overwriting users and profiles
User
Profile
Enabling SSH
RADIUS configurations
Configuring RADIUS authentication
Configuring RADIUS authorization
Configuring RADIUS accounting
Configuring 802.1x RADIUS policies
TACACS+ configurations
Enabling TACACS+ authentication
Configuring TACACS+ authorization
Configuring TACACS+ accounting
Configuring login controls
Security command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Security commands
Management Access Filter commands
Security password commands
Profile commands
RADIUS commands
SSH commands
TACPLUS commands
User commands
User template commands
Dot1x commands
Keychain commands
Login control commands
IPsec commands
Show commands
Security commands
Login control commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
General security commands
Login, Telnet, SSH and FTP commands
Management Access Filter commands
Password commands
Profile management commands
User management commands
RADIUS client commands
TACACS+ client commands
Generic 802.1x commands
TCP Enhanced Authentication commands
IPsec commands
Show commands
Security commands
Login control
Debug commands
SNMP
SNMP overview
SNMP architecture
Management information base
SNMP protocol operations
SNMP versions
Management information access control
User-based security model community strings
Views
Access groups
Users
Which SNMP version to use?
Configuration notes
General
Configuring SNMP with CLI
SNMP configuration overview
Configuring SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c
Configuring SNMPv3
Basic SNMP security configuration
Configuring SNMP components
Configuring a community string
Configuring view options
Configuring access options
Configuring USM community options
Configuring other SNMP parameters
SNMP command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
SNMP system commands
SNMP security commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
SNMP system commands
SNMP security commands
Show commands
NETCONF
NETCONF overview
NETCONF in SR OS
YANG data models
Transport and sessions
NETCONF operations
<get>
<get-config>
<edit-config>
<copy-config> and <delete-config>
<validate>
Datastores and URLs
General NETCONF behavior
Example: multiple use of standard NETCONF namespace
Example: non-standard namespace defined in <rpc> tag
Example: non-standard namespace not defined in <rpc> tag
Example: non-standard namespace or prefix not defined in <rpc> tag
Example: chunked frame mechanism
Example: two rollback items with responses
Example: syntax error in the rollback request
Example: error in processing the request
Example: error in second item of the request
System provisioned configuration objects
Establishing a NETCONF session
XML content layer
<edit-config> with XML content layer
<get-config> with XML content layer
Example: request that returns an error
Example: content match node on a list key
Example: selection node that is a container
Example: list name node as an invalid selection node
Example: empty leaf node as invalid selection node
Example: key repeated in the same instance of the list node
Example: retrieving the full configuration
XML content layer examples
Example: checking NETCONF status
Example: creating a basic VPRN service
Example: creating a VPRN service with a SAP
CLI content layer
CLI content layer examples
Example: configuration change
Example: retrieving configuration information
Example: retrieving full configuration information
Example: <get> request
NETCONF command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
NETCONF system commands
NETCONF security commands
Show commands
Configuration commands
NETCONF system commands
NETCONF security commands
Show commands
Event and accounting logs
Logging overview
Log destinations
Console
Session
Memory logs
Log files
SNMP trap group
Syslog
Event logs
Event sources
Event control
Log manager and event logs
Event filter policies
Event log entries
Simple logger event throttling
Default system log
Accounting logs
Accounting records
Accounting record names and collection periods
Accounting record details
Configuration guidelines
Reporting and time-based accounting
Configuration notes
Configuring logging with CLI
Log configuration overview
Log types
Basic event log configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring an event log
Configuring a file ID
Configuring an accounting policy
Configuring event control
Configuring throttle rate
Configuring a log filter
Configuring an SNMP trap group
Configuring SNMP dying gasp
Configuration guidelines for SNMP dying gasp trap
Configuring a syslog target
Log management tasks
Modifying a log file
Deleting a log file
Modifying a file ID
Deleting a file ID
Modifying a syslog ID
Deleting a syslog
Modifying an SNMP trap group
Deleting an SNMP trap group
Modifying a log filter
Deleting a log filter
Modifying event control parameters
Returning to the default event control configuration
Log command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Event control commands
Accounting policy commands
File ID commands
Event filter commands
Log ID commands
SNMP trap group commands
Syslog commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Tools dump commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Event control commands
Log file commands
Log filter commands
Log filter entry commands
Log filter entry match commands
Syslog commands
SNMP trap group commands
Logging destination commands
Accounting policy commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Facility alarms
Facility alarms overview
Facility alarms vs. log events
Facility alarm severities and alarm LED behavior
Facility alarm hierarchy
Facility alarm list
Configuring logging with CLI
Basic facility alarm configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring the maximum number of alarms to clear
Facility alarms command reference
Command hierarchies
Facility alarm configuration commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Show commands
Appendix: accounting record name details for 7210 SAS platforms
Accounting record name details for 7210 SAS-D
Accounting record name details for 7210 SAS-Dxp
Accounting record name details for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
Accounting record name details for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T
Accounting record name details for 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Standards and protocol support
Customer Documentation and Product Support
Legal notice
Getting started
About this guide
Document structure and content
7210 SAS modes of operation
7210 SAS port modes
7210 SAS system management configuration process
Security
Authentication, authorization, and accounting
Authentication
Local authentication
RADIUS authentication
RADIUS server selection
Direct mode
Round-robin mode
Server reachability detection
Application-specific behavior
Operator management
RADIUS authentication
RADIUS accounting
RADIUS PE-discovery
TACACS+ authentication
Password hashing
Authorization
Local authorization
RADIUS authorization
TACACS+ authorization
Accounting
RADIUS accounting
TACACS+ accounting
Security controls
When a server does not respond
Access request flow
Control and management traffic protection
CPM management access filters
CPM protocols and ports
Management Access Filter
MAF packet match
MAF IPv4/IPv6 filter entry match criteria
MAF policy action
MAF policy statistics and logging
Centralized CPU protection
Vendor-specific attributes (VSAS)
User (VSA) configuration example
Other security features
Security algorithms
Secure Shell (SSH)
SSH PKI authentication
User public key generation
MAC client and server list
Cipher client and server list
KEX client and server list
Exponential login back-off
User lockout
Encryption
802.1x network access control
TCP Enhanced Authentication Option
Packet formats
Keychain
Configuration notes
General
Configuring security with CLI
Setting up security attributes
Configuring authentication
Configuring authorization
Configuring accounting
Security configurations
Security configuration procedures
Configuring Management Access Filters
Configuring password management parameters
Configuring profiles
Configuring users
Configuring keychains
Copying and overwriting users and profiles
User
Profile
Enabling SSH
RADIUS configurations
Configuring RADIUS authentication
Configuring RADIUS authorization
Configuring RADIUS accounting
Configuring 802.1x RADIUS policies
TACACS+ configurations
Enabling TACACS+ authentication
Configuring TACACS+ authorization
Configuring TACACS+ accounting
Configuring login controls
Security command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Security commands
Management Access Filter commands
Security password commands
Profile commands
RADIUS commands
SSH commands
TACPLUS commands
User commands
User template commands
Dot1x commands
Keychain commands
Login control commands
IPsec commands
Show commands
Security commands
Login control commands
Clear commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
General security commands
Login, Telnet, SSH and FTP commands
Management Access Filter commands
Password commands
Profile management commands
User management commands
RADIUS client commands
TACACS+ client commands
Generic 802.1x commands
TCP Enhanced Authentication commands
IPsec commands
Show commands
Security commands
Login control
Debug commands
SNMP
SNMP overview
SNMP architecture
Management information base
SNMP protocol operations
SNMP versions
Management information access control
User-based security model community strings
Views
Access groups
Users
Which SNMP version to use?
Configuration notes
General
Configuring SNMP with CLI
SNMP configuration overview
Configuring SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c
Configuring SNMPv3
Basic SNMP security configuration
Configuring SNMP components
Configuring a community string
Configuring view options
Configuring access options
Configuring USM community options
Configuring other SNMP parameters
SNMP command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
SNMP system commands
SNMP security commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
SNMP system commands
SNMP security commands
Show commands
NETCONF
NETCONF overview
NETCONF in SR OS
YANG data models
Transport and sessions
NETCONF operations
<get>
<get-config>
<edit-config>
<copy-config> and <delete-config>
<validate>
Datastores and URLs
General NETCONF behavior
Example: multiple use of standard NETCONF namespace
Example: non-standard namespace defined in <rpc> tag
Example: non-standard namespace not defined in <rpc> tag
Example: non-standard namespace or prefix not defined in <rpc> tag
Example: chunked frame mechanism
Example: two rollback items with responses
Example: syntax error in the rollback request
Example: error in processing the request
Example: error in second item of the request
System provisioned configuration objects
Establishing a NETCONF session
XML content layer
<edit-config> with XML content layer
<get-config> with XML content layer
Example: request that returns an error
Example: content match node on a list key
Example: selection node that is a container
Example: list name node as an invalid selection node
Example: empty leaf node as invalid selection node
Example: key repeated in the same instance of the list node
Example: retrieving the full configuration
XML content layer examples
Example: checking NETCONF status
Example: creating a basic VPRN service
Example: creating a VPRN service with a SAP
CLI content layer
CLI content layer examples
Example: configuration change
Example: retrieving configuration information
Example: retrieving full configuration information
Example: <get> request
NETCONF command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
NETCONF system commands
NETCONF security commands
Show commands
Configuration commands
NETCONF system commands
NETCONF security commands
Show commands
Event and accounting logs
Logging overview
Log destinations
Console
Session
Memory logs
Log files
SNMP trap group
Syslog
Event logs
Event sources
Event control
Log manager and event logs
Event filter policies
Event log entries
Simple logger event throttling
Default system log
Accounting logs
Accounting records
Accounting record names and collection periods
Accounting record details
Configuration guidelines
Reporting and time-based accounting
Configuration notes
Configuring logging with CLI
Log configuration overview
Log types
Basic event log configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring an event log
Configuring a file ID
Configuring an accounting policy
Configuring event control
Configuring throttle rate
Configuring a log filter
Configuring an SNMP trap group
Configuring SNMP dying gasp
Configuration guidelines for SNMP dying gasp trap
Configuring a syslog target
Log management tasks
Modifying a log file
Deleting a log file
Modifying a file ID
Deleting a file ID
Modifying a syslog ID
Deleting a syslog
Modifying an SNMP trap group
Deleting an SNMP trap group
Modifying a log filter
Deleting a log filter
Modifying event control parameters
Returning to the default event control configuration
Log command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Event control commands
Accounting policy commands
File ID commands
Event filter commands
Log ID commands
SNMP trap group commands
Syslog commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Tools dump commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Event control commands
Log file commands
Log filter commands
Log filter entry commands
Log filter entry match commands
Syslog commands
SNMP trap group commands
Logging destination commands
Accounting policy commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Facility alarms
Facility alarms overview
Facility alarms vs. log events
Facility alarm severities and alarm LED behavior
Facility alarm hierarchy
Facility alarm list
Configuring logging with CLI
Basic facility alarm configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring the maximum number of alarms to clear
Facility alarms command reference
Command hierarchies
Facility alarm configuration commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Show commands
Appendix: accounting record name details for 7210 SAS platforms
Accounting record name details for 7210 SAS-D
Accounting record name details for 7210 SAS-Dxp
Accounting record name details for 7210 SAS-K 2F1C2T
Accounting record name details for 7210 SAS-K 2F6C4T
Accounting record name details for 7210 SAS-K 3SFP+ 8C
Standards and protocol support
Customer Documentation and Product Support
7210 SAS-Mxp, R6, R12, S, Sx, T System Management Guide Release 22.9.R1
Legal notice
Getting started
About this guide
Document structure and content
7210 SAS modes of operation
7210 SAS port modes
7210 SAS system management configuration process
Conventions
Precautionary and information messages
Options or substeps in procedures and sequential workflows
Security
Authentication, authorization, and accounting
Authentication
Local authentication
RADIUS authentication
RADIUS server selection
Direct mode
Round-Robin mode
Server reachability detection
Application-specific behavior
TACACS+ authentication
Password hashing
Authorization
Local authorization
RADIUS authorization
TACACS+ authorization
Accounting
RADIUS accounting
TACACS+ accounting
Security controls
When a server does not respond
Access request flow
Control and management traffic protection
CPM Management Access Filters
CPM protocols and ports
Management Access Filter
MAF packet match
MAF IPv4/IPv6 filter entry match criteria
MAF policy action
MAF policy statistics and logging
CPU protection modes
Centralized CPU protection
DCP
DCP applicability
Log events, statistics, status and SNMP support
DCP policer resource management
Operational guidelines
Vendor-specific attributes (VSAs)
Sample user (VSA) configuration
Other security features
Security algorithms
Secure Shell
SSH PKI authentication
User public key generation
MAC client and server list
Cipher client and server list
KEX client and server list
Exponential login backoff
User lockout
Encryption
802.1x network access control
TCP Enhanced Authentication Option
Packet formats
Keychain
Configuration notes
General
Configuring security with CLI
Setting up security attributes
Configuring authentication
Configuring authorization
Configuring accounting
Security configurations
Security configuration procedures
Configuring Management Access Filters
Configuring password management parameters
Configuring profiles
Configuring users
Configuring keychains
Copying and overwriting users and profiles
User
Profile
Enabling SSH
RADIUS configurations
Configuring RADIUS authentication
Configuring RADIUS authorization
Configuring RADIUS accounting
Configuring 802.1x RADIUS policies
TACACS+ configurations
Enabling TACACS+ authentication
Configuring TACACS+ authorization
Configuring TACACS+ accounting
Configuring login controls
Security command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Security commands
Management Access Filter commands
Distributed CPU protection commands
Security password commands
Profile commands
RADIUS commands
SSH commands
TACPLUS commands
User commands
User template commands
Dot1x commands
Keychain commands
Login control commands
IPsec commands
Show commands
Security
Login control
Clear commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
General security commands
Login, Telnet, SSH and FTP commands
Management Access Filter commands
Distributed CPU protection commands
Password commands
Profile management commands
User management commands
RADIUS client commands
TACACS+ client commands
Generic 802.1x commands
TCP Enhanced Authentication commands
IPsec commands
Show commands
Security commands
Login control
Debug commands
SNMP
SNMP overview
SNMP architecture
Management information base
SNMP protocol operations
SNMP versions
Management information access control
User-based security model community strings
Views
Access groups
Users
Which SNMP version to use
Configuration notes
General
Configuring SNMP with CLI
SNMP configuration overview
Configuring SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c
Configuring SNMPv3
Basic SNMP security configuration
Configuring SNMP components
Configuring a community string
Configuring view options
Configuring access options
Configuring USM community options
Configuring other SNMP parameters
SNMP command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
SNMP system commands
SNMP security commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
SNMP system commands
SNMP security commands
Show commands
NETCONF
NETCONF overview
NETCONF in SR OS
YANG data models
Transport and sessions
NETCONF operations
<get>
<get-config>
<edit-config>
<copy-config> and <delete-config>
<validate>
Datastores and URLs
General NETCONF behavior
Example: multiple use of standard NETCONF namespace
Example: non-standard namespace defined in <rpc> tag
Example: non-standard namespace not defined in <rpc> tag
Example: non-standard namespace or prefix not defined in <rpc> tag
Example: chunked frame mechanism
Example: two rollback items with responses
Example: syntax error in the rollback request
Example: error in processing the request
Example: error in second item of the request
System provisioned configuration objects
Establishing a NETCONF session
XML content layer
<edit-config> with XML content layer
<get-config> with XML content layer
Example: request that returns an error
Example: content match node on a list key
Example: selection node that is a container
Example: list name node as an invalid selection node
Example: empty leaf node as invalid selection node
Example: key repeated in the same instance of the list node
Example: retrieving the full configuration
XML content layer examples
Example: checking NETCONF status
Example: creating a basic VPRN service
Example: creating a VPRN service with a SAP
CLI content layer
CLI content layer examples
Example: configuration change
Example: retrieving configuration information
Example: retrieving full configuration information
Example: <get> request
NETCONF command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Netconf system commands
Netconf security commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
NETCONF system commands
NETCONF security commands
Show commands
Event and accounting logs
Logging overview
Log destinations
Console
Session
Memory logs
Log files
SNMP trap group
Syslog
Event logs
Event sources
Event control
Log manager and event logs
Event filter policies
Event log entries
Simple logger event throttling
Default system log
Accounting logs
Accounting records
Configuration guidelines
Accounting files
Design considerations
Configuration notes
Configuring logging with CLI
Log configuration overview
Log types
Basic event log configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring an event log
Configuring a file ID
Configuring an accounting policy
Configuring event control
Configuring throttle rate
Configuring a log filter
Configuring an SNMP trap group
Configuring SNMP dying gasp
Configuration guidelines for SNMP dying gasp trap
Configuring a syslog target
Log management tasks
Modifying a log file
Deleting a log file
Modifying a file ID
Deleting a file ID
Modifying a syslog ID
Deleting a syslog
Modifying an SNMP trap group
Deleting an SNMP trap group
Modifying a log filter
Deleting a log filter
Modifying event control parameters
Returning to the default event control configuration
Log command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Event control commands
Accounting policy commands
File ID commands
Event filter commands
Log ID commands
SNMP trap group commands
Syslog commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Tools dump commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Event control commands
Log file commands
Log filter commands
Log filter entry commands
Log filter entry match commands
Syslog commands
SNMP trap group commands
Logging destination commands
Accounting policy commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Facility alarms
Facility alarms overview
Facility alarms vs. log events
Facility alarm severities and Alarm LED behavior
Facility alarm hierarchy
Facility alarm list
Configuring logging with CLI
Basic facility alarm configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring the maximum number of alarms to clear
Facility alarms command reference
Command hierarchies
Facility alarm configuration commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Show commands
Appendix: accounting record name details for 7210 SAS platforms
Accounting record name details for 7210 SAS-T (access-uplink or network mode)
Accounting record name details for 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
Accounting record name details for 7210 SAS-Mxp
Accounting record name details for 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE
Standards and protocol support
Customer Documentation and Product Support
Legal notice
Getting started
About this guide
Document structure and content
7210 SAS modes of operation
7210 SAS port modes
7210 SAS system management configuration process
Conventions
Precautionary and information messages
Options or substeps in procedures and sequential workflows
Security
Authentication, authorization, and accounting
Authentication
Local authentication
RADIUS authentication
RADIUS server selection
Direct mode
Round-Robin mode
Server reachability detection
Application-specific behavior
TACACS+ authentication
Password hashing
Authorization
Local authorization
RADIUS authorization
TACACS+ authorization
Accounting
RADIUS accounting
TACACS+ accounting
Security controls
When a server does not respond
Access request flow
Control and management traffic protection
CPM Management Access Filters
CPM protocols and ports
Management Access Filter
MAF packet match
MAF IPv4/IPv6 filter entry match criteria
MAF policy action
MAF policy statistics and logging
CPU protection modes
Centralized CPU protection
DCP
DCP applicability
Log events, statistics, status and SNMP support
DCP policer resource management
Operational guidelines
Vendor-specific attributes (VSAs)
Sample user (VSA) configuration
Other security features
Security algorithms
Secure Shell
SSH PKI authentication
User public key generation
MAC client and server list
Cipher client and server list
KEX client and server list
Exponential login backoff
User lockout
Encryption
802.1x network access control
TCP Enhanced Authentication Option
Packet formats
Keychain
Configuration notes
General
Configuring security with CLI
Setting up security attributes
Configuring authentication
Configuring authorization
Configuring accounting
Security configurations
Security configuration procedures
Configuring Management Access Filters
Configuring password management parameters
Configuring profiles
Configuring users
Configuring keychains
Copying and overwriting users and profiles
User
Profile
Enabling SSH
RADIUS configurations
Configuring RADIUS authentication
Configuring RADIUS authorization
Configuring RADIUS accounting
Configuring 802.1x RADIUS policies
TACACS+ configurations
Enabling TACACS+ authentication
Configuring TACACS+ authorization
Configuring TACACS+ accounting
Configuring login controls
Security command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Security commands
Management Access Filter commands
Distributed CPU protection commands
Security password commands
Profile commands
RADIUS commands
SSH commands
TACPLUS commands
User commands
User template commands
Dot1x commands
Keychain commands
Login control commands
IPsec commands
Show commands
Security
Login control
Clear commands
Debug commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
General security commands
Login, Telnet, SSH and FTP commands
Management Access Filter commands
Distributed CPU protection commands
Password commands
Profile management commands
User management commands
RADIUS client commands
TACACS+ client commands
Generic 802.1x commands
TCP Enhanced Authentication commands
IPsec commands
Show commands
Security commands
Login control
Debug commands
SNMP
SNMP overview
SNMP architecture
Management information base
SNMP protocol operations
SNMP versions
Management information access control
User-based security model community strings
Views
Access groups
Users
Which SNMP version to use
Configuration notes
General
Configuring SNMP with CLI
SNMP configuration overview
Configuring SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c
Configuring SNMPv3
Basic SNMP security configuration
Configuring SNMP components
Configuring a community string
Configuring view options
Configuring access options
Configuring USM community options
Configuring other SNMP parameters
SNMP command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
SNMP system commands
SNMP security commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
SNMP system commands
SNMP security commands
Show commands
NETCONF
NETCONF overview
NETCONF in SR OS
YANG data models
Transport and sessions
NETCONF operations
<get>
<get-config>
<edit-config>
<copy-config> and <delete-config>
<validate>
Datastores and URLs
General NETCONF behavior
Example: multiple use of standard NETCONF namespace
Example: non-standard namespace defined in <rpc> tag
Example: non-standard namespace not defined in <rpc> tag
Example: non-standard namespace or prefix not defined in <rpc> tag
Example: chunked frame mechanism
Example: two rollback items with responses
Example: syntax error in the rollback request
Example: error in processing the request
Example: error in second item of the request
System provisioned configuration objects
Establishing a NETCONF session
XML content layer
<edit-config> with XML content layer
<get-config> with XML content layer
Example: request that returns an error
Example: content match node on a list key
Example: selection node that is a container
Example: list name node as an invalid selection node
Example: empty leaf node as invalid selection node
Example: key repeated in the same instance of the list node
Example: retrieving the full configuration
XML content layer examples
Example: checking NETCONF status
Example: creating a basic VPRN service
Example: creating a VPRN service with a SAP
CLI content layer
CLI content layer examples
Example: configuration change
Example: retrieving configuration information
Example: retrieving full configuration information
Example: <get> request
NETCONF command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Netconf system commands
Netconf security commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
NETCONF system commands
NETCONF security commands
Show commands
Event and accounting logs
Logging overview
Log destinations
Console
Session
Memory logs
Log files
SNMP trap group
Syslog
Event logs
Event sources
Event control
Log manager and event logs
Event filter policies
Event log entries
Simple logger event throttling
Default system log
Accounting logs
Accounting records
Configuration guidelines
Accounting files
Design considerations
Configuration notes
Configuring logging with CLI
Log configuration overview
Log types
Basic event log configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring an event log
Configuring a file ID
Configuring an accounting policy
Configuring event control
Configuring throttle rate
Configuring a log filter
Configuring an SNMP trap group
Configuring SNMP dying gasp
Configuration guidelines for SNMP dying gasp trap
Configuring a syslog target
Log management tasks
Modifying a log file
Deleting a log file
Modifying a file ID
Deleting a file ID
Modifying a syslog ID
Deleting a syslog
Modifying an SNMP trap group
Deleting an SNMP trap group
Modifying a log filter
Deleting a log filter
Modifying event control parameters
Returning to the default event control configuration
Log command reference
Command hierarchies
Configuration commands
Event control commands
Accounting policy commands
File ID commands
Event filter commands
Log ID commands
SNMP trap group commands
Syslog commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Tools dump commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Generic commands
Event control commands
Log file commands
Log filter commands
Log filter entry commands
Log filter entry match commands
Syslog commands
SNMP trap group commands
Logging destination commands
Accounting policy commands
Show commands
Clear commands
Facility alarms
Facility alarms overview
Facility alarms vs. log events
Facility alarm severities and Alarm LED behavior
Facility alarm hierarchy
Facility alarm list
Configuring logging with CLI
Basic facility alarm configuration
Common configuration tasks
Configuring the maximum number of alarms to clear
Facility alarms command reference
Command hierarchies
Facility alarm configuration commands
Show commands
Command descriptions
Configuration commands
Show commands
Appendix: accounting record name details for 7210 SAS platforms
Accounting record name details for 7210 SAS-T (access-uplink or network mode)
Accounting record name details for 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
Accounting record name details for 7210 SAS-Mxp
Accounting record name details for 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE
Standards and protocol support
Customer Documentation and Product Support
Guide to Documentation Release 22.9.R1
Legal notice
About this guide
7210 SAS documentation suite
Software guides
Hardware guides
Release notes
Accessing documentation
Searching for information in PDFs
Technical support
How to give feedback on documentation
Customer Documentation and Product Support
Legal notice
About this guide
7210 SAS documentation suite
Software guides
Hardware guides
Release notes
Accessing documentation
Searching for information in PDFs
Technical support
How to give feedback on documentation
Customer Documentation and Product Support